JP2021132717A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of drastically increasing an interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes a central winning unit 37 that is opened and closed when game balls shot into a game area enter start winning parts 33a, 33b and a small win is won by a winning/losing lottery based on the entry of game balls. A destination of game balls entering an internal area of the central winning unit 37 is distributed to a winning/losing lottery area or an accessory operation lottery area by a route distribution member 603. Game balls guided to the winning/losing lottery area are used for a winning/losing lottery by a rotor unit 410. A big win state occurs when winning the winning/losing lottery. In the meantime, game balls guided to the accessory operation lottery area are guided to a special gate 650, and an operation assist lottery is held when the entry is detected. When the operation assist lottery is won, a movable accessory becomes in an operation state advantageous to a player for predetermined time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, when a gaming ball provided with a variable ball entry means and entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning opening) provided in the internal area, the player A pachinko machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197312

However, in the conventional gaming machines as described above, the gaming effect tends to be monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter,
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and the behavior of the game ball is changed. Movable bodies that can be made to
It is provided with a movable body control means capable of executing a control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation in a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied.
The gist is that the period from at least a predetermined opportunity until the movable body becomes the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame, the game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical composition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the incoming ball count processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the non-special prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the type entry process. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize jackpot setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the discrimination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows the end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the blade member opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning part control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the bypass mechanism control process. It is a flowchart which shows the residual sphere monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hold information storage process. It is a front view of the central winning unit. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the operation of the route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the rotating body unit. (A) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a housed state, and (b) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a protruding state. (A) is a schematic partial cross-sectional view showing a movable accessory in a housed state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a protruding state and its related configuration. It is a front view for demonstrating the route distribution member and the like which concerns on another Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional front view for demonstrating the route distribution area and the like which concerns on another embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 constituting the outer frame thereof, and the inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. However, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the nails and accessories arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, in the outer frame 11, the upper side frame component 11a and the lower frame component 11b are made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame component 11c and the right side frame component 11d are extruded from an aluminum alloy. It is made of a material, and each of the frame constituent parts 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right side frame constituent portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84, 85 for locking the locking member of the locking device 600 are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on the inner frame opening detection switch 92, which will be described later, is projected from the lower receiving portion 85 toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame component 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed between the inner frame 12 and the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened to the front side with this opening / closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38.

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with the opening / closing axis set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are inside the lower plate 15. It can be stored in. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

An effect button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. When the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed or the effect content is changed on the effect display device 42 or the like, which will be described later.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter, simply referred to as “handle”) 18 projecting toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detecting means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 as a launching means, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of the rotating operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball while holding the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward the launching device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be discharged are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate connecting passage 71 and the discharge port 16 which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 was opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Further, various lamps and other light emitting means are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting / blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach.

For example, an annular illumination unit 102 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the peripheral edge of the window unit 101. Further, error indicator lamps 104 that light up when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. A large number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the upper portion of each error indicator lamp 104 in the annular illumination portion 102. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached to each other in a front and rear pair, but is attached after being assembled into a round shape as a whole.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate continuous passage 71 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate continuous passage 73 that connects the payout mechanism unit 352 to the upper plate 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting a game ball located in the lower plate continuous passage 71. By the presence of the fullness detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate continuous passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. At the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), a launch device 60 and a launch rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched from the launch device 60 are provided. It is installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60.

In the present embodiment, the launch device 60 is controlled to be prohibited from launching based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the retention of the game ball in the lower plate continuous passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the launching device 60 is allowed to be launched.

Further, a ball feeding device 63 is provided above the launching device 60. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by a driving means such as a solenoid.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game ball paid out by the payout mechanism unit 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate continuous passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate and a passage leading to the lower plate continuous passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force such as a spring to substantially close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the rear end on the entrance side of the lower plate passage 71. Then, in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the entrance portion (ball inflow portion) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the discharge passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance between them. The game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate connecting passage 73 are filled with the game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate connecting passage 71 side and are paid out to the lower plate 15 through the lower plate connecting passage 71. It will be.

As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30, which is the game area, is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and is attached with a rail 50 that guides the game ball launched from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. The rail 50 may be used as a ball passage. As a result, the game ball launched by the rotation operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail component 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component portion 52. The game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surfaces of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the rail 50 may flow backward until the game ball launched by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53 as a regulating means, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are game games. Excluded from the area.

Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 lowers the game ball that has fallen from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 that guides the dish 15 is formed. The area where the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged may be a specific area. If the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. ..

Further, the game board 30 includes a general winning unit 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning unit 33 as a starting ball means (specifically, a first starting winning unit 33a and a second starting winning unit 33b), and a through. A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means, and the like are arranged in a through hole formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30.

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection means) for detecting a game ball that has entered the various ball entry means in response to various ball entry means such as the general winning unit 31. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and the first start is performed. A first start winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the winning section 33a, a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting winning section 33b, and a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball wins (wins) in various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number is placed on the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. Prize balls (game balls) will be paid out. For example, 3 prizes when the starting prize unit 33 has a ball, 5 prizes when the general prize unit 31 has a ball, and 10 prizes when the variable prize device 32 has a ball. The ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out opening 36, and a game ball that has not won a prize in various winning means such as the general winning section 31 is discharged to the outside of the game area through the out opening 36. .. Further, in the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 40 to 45 and the like.

The central winning unit 37 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area (game board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 forming an internal area 401 in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal region 401 is visible through the front panel 402.

A pair of left and right entry ball openings 403 are formed on the upper portion of the housing 400, which serve as an entrance portion for a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401. Further, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right blade members 404 for opening and closing the ball entry opening 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. There is. The "blade member 404" constitutes the "opening / closing member" in the present embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is provided so as to be rotatable and displaceable between a closed position at which the corresponding ball entry opening 403 is closed and an open position at which the blade member 404 is opened. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and the game ball cannot enter the internal region 401 (ball entry is impossible). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is opened and the game ball can enter the internal region 401 (ball entry is possible). It becomes.

As will be described in detail later, the blade member 404 has a ball entered in the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b), and is small in the winning / failing lottery based on the winning. If you win, it will be open for a predetermined time. Further, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, and when one is in the open position, the other is in the open position and one is in the closed position. Is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 is provided in the route distribution area 406 in which the game ball entered from the entry ball opening 403 is first guided, the winning / failing lottery area 407 provided in the lower position thereof, and the lower position thereof. It is divided into a type lottery area 408 as a type lottery area and an accessory operation lottery area 409 provided at a position to the right of the winning / failing lottery area 407.

First, the route distribution area 406 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42 and the like. In the route distribution area 406, the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 from the entry opening 403 is once guided to the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400, and then to the central portion in the left-right direction of the route distribution area 406. In the introduction passage 601 to be guided, the drop passage 602 for dropping the game ball led out from the outlet portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 opened in the central portion in the left-right direction of the route distribution area 406, and the lower portion of the fall passage 602. A route distribution member 603 as a route distribution means provided, a normal guide passage 604 provided at a left position of the route distribution member 603 and capable of guiding a game ball to the winning / losing lottery area 407, and a route distribution member 603. It is provided at a right position and is provided with a special guide passage (special passage) 605 capable of guiding the game ball to the above-mentioned accessory operation lottery area 409.

In the present embodiment, the "first route" is configured by the normal guide passage 604 and the like, and the "second route" is configured by the special guide passage 605 and the like.

Each of the pair of left and right entrance portions 601b of the introduction passage 601 is provided with an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball entered from the entry ball opening 403.

In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the left entrance opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b, and the game ball that has entered the right entrance 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b. It is configured to pass through, and the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route distribution member 603 includes a tubular shaft portion 611 having a shaft hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece portion 613 protruding upward from the shaft portion 611, and a shaft portion. It includes a left piece portion 614 protruding from the 611 to the left and a right piece portion 615 protruding to the right from the shaft portion 611.

A shaft pin 610 is inserted through the shaft hole 611a of the shaft portion 611. The rear end of the shaft pin 610 is supported by the upper rear wall portion 400a defining the back side of the drop passage 602, and the front end thereof is supported by the front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) defining the front side of the drop passage 602. Has been done. As a result, the route distribution member 603 is rotatably supported around the shaft pin 610.

Further, a protrusion 617 having a substantially triangular shape in front view is formed at a position below the route distribution member 603. Then, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the route distribution member 603, the central piece 613 is positioned at the center in the left-right direction (axis pin) by an urging means (maintenance means) such as a weight or a coil spring (not shown). It is tilted to the right of (the position of 610), and the right piece portion 615 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is maintained in a right tilted state urged by the right tilted surface of the protrusion 617.

In such a right-tilted state, the tip portion 613a of the central piece portion 613 is in contact with or close to the right wall portion 602a of the fall passage 602, and the game ball falling down the fall passage 602 is in the special guide passage 605 on the right side. It becomes impossible to flow down to, and it becomes possible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

That is, in the normal time when the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the right, the route distribution member 603 closes the special guide passage 605, while the normal guide passage 604 is in the open state and falls down the fall passage 602. The game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 along the left guide surface formed by the left side surface of the central piece 613 of the route distribution member 603 and the upper surface of the left piece 614.

Along with this, the route distribution member 603 rotates in the counterclockwise direction against the urging force of the urging means by the force received from the game ball in contact with the left piece portion 614 [see FIG. 41 (b)). ].

As a result, for a predetermined time, in the route distribution member 603, the central piece 613 is tilted to the left side of the center position in the left-right direction (position of the shaft pin 610), and the left piece 614 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction. The left inclined surface of the portion 617 is urged to the left inclined state.

In such a left inclined state, the tip portion 613a of the central piece portion 613 is in contact with or close to the left side wall portion 602b of the fall passage 602, and the game ball falling down the fall passage 602 is in the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. It will be in a state where it cannot flow down to, and it will be in a state where it can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

That is, while the route distribution member 603 is in the left inclined state for a predetermined time, the route distribution member 603 closes the normal guide passage 604, while the special guide passage 605 is in the open state. As a result, the second game ball (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, which is continuously falling to the first game ball B1 guided to the normal guide passage 604) is falling down the fall passage 602 at this timing. If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side along the right side guide surface formed by the right side surface of the central piece 613 of the route distribution member 603 and the upper surface of the right piece 615. It will be taken.

Once the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left, the route distribution member 603 comes into contact with the right piece 615 when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side by the urging force of the urging means. (The force received is also applied). It rotates clockwise and returns to the normal rightward tilted state [see FIG. 41 (c)].

In the present embodiment, the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the right tilted posture, which is the first posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted posture, which is the second posture, is in the second state. Equivalent to. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball is sent to the first route in which the route distribution member 603 is composed of the normal guide passage 604 or the like, the second route in which the route distribution member 603 is composed of the special guide passage 605 or the like, or the like, such as the first state or the second state. The flowable state constitutes a specific state. Of course, the specific state is not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the configuration of the accessory operation lottery area 409 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory operation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which a game ball guided by the special guide passage 605 can enter (pass). The width of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 is set so that the game balls can pass through one by one. Further, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged to the outside of the internal region 401 (the back side of the game board 30) through a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "triggered ball entry means" in the present embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 that detects a game ball passing through the special gate 650. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "triggered ball detecting means" in the present embodiment.

When the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, an operation assist lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, which will be described later, is performed. Then, when the operation assist lottery is won, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. Details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, even if the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, the prize ball is not paid out (the number of prize balls is 0). Not limited to this, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out.

Next, the configuration of the winning / failing lottery area 407 will be described in detail. The winning / failing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotating body unit 410 as a winning / failing sorting means. The rotating body unit 410 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided from the route distribution area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or the outside of the internal area 401. The width of the normal guide passage 604 is set so that the game balls can pass through one by one.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the rotating body unit 410 includes a unit base 411 as a base portion and a unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side thereof.

On the unit base 411, a substantially disk-shaped rotating body 414 is mounted on an installation base 413 projecting on the upper surface side thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotationally driving the rotating body 414 is mounted. .. On the other hand, on the lower surface side of the unit base 411, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided.

The rotating body 414 is installed so that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction so that the upper surface portion thereof faces diagonally upward on the front surface side. The rotating body motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main control device 261. Under such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise in the present embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 is formed with pocket portions 416 at three locations on the outer peripheral edge thereof, each of which can receive one game ball. The three pocket portions 416 are divided into one special pocket portion 416a and the other (two) non-special pocket portions 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416b opens on the outer peripheral side and the upper side of the rotating body 414 and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a opens on the outer peripheral side, the upper side and the lower side of the rotating body 414, and the bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b does not exist. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a colored resin material different from other portions. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical tubular wall portion 431 arranged so as to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed so as to extend from the periphery of the tubular wall portion 431 to the outer peripheral side. ing.

The upper edge portion of the cylinder wall portion 431 projects upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 for communicating the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the cylinder wall portion 431 is provided on the front side thereof. ..

Further, the upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured so that the game ball can roll. In the stage portion 432, the portion located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined forward and downward toward the cylinder wall portion 431 side, and the portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is directed toward the rear (gate portion 435 side). It is tilted downward.

As a result, the game ball led out from the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the central rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 defining the back side of the winning / failing lottery area 407 and guided to the rear side of the stage portion 432 While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is regulated by the cylinder wall portion 431, it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise on the stage portion 432 toward the front side, and swings left and right multiple times in front of the gate portion 435, etc. Then, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a or non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotating body 414 match, the player enters the pocket portion 416. ..

Further, the unit base 411 has a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game ball housed in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b. Is provided with an out passage 428 for discharging the engine to the outside of the internal region 401.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotating body 414, that is, at a position to the right of the gate portion 435. On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427, that is, at a position on the far right side of the first V winning passage 427.

Further, the entrance side of the first V winning passage 427 is opened on the upper surface of the installation table 413, and the pocket portion 416 of the rotating body 414 is configured to pass above the opening. Then, the game ball that has entered the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435 is positioned between the special pocket portion 416a and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. When they match, the ball falls downward from the special pocket portion 416a and enters the first V winning passage 427. At the position corresponding to the first V winning passage 427, the tubular wall portion 431 projecting downward from the back surface of the stage portion 432 restricts the game ball from falling off from the side surface side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435, the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 become as the rotating body 414 rotates. Even if the positions match, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b prevents the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b from falling (entering) into the 1V winning passage 427. It has become.

Further, at the position corresponding to the out passage 428, a notch portion 431a is formed at the lower edge portion of the cylinder wall portion 431. As a result, when the rotating body 414 further rotates and the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b in which the game ball is housed and the out passage 428 match, the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b becomes the bottom wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 417, the rotating body 414 moves to the outer peripheral side and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch portion 431a of the tubular wall portion 431.

The housing 400 is formed with a connecting passage 429 connected to the outlet of the 1st V winning passage 427, and the connecting passage 429 establishes a communication state between the 1V winning passage 427 and the type lottery area 408.

Further, the first V winning passage 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. Then, a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427, and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, thereby granting the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state). It becomes. Therefore, the "first V winning passage 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in the present embodiment.

In the jackpot generated when the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427, 30 seconds of the specified time elapses after the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. On the condition that a predetermined number of eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32, one opening / closing operation until the closed state is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined round).

In the present embodiment, the types of the jackpot state are "3 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 3 times, "7 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 7 times, and the special prize state. A "15 round jackpot" in which (round) is repeated 15 times is set.

However, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the ball entry is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the jackpot state is not immediately started, but the jackpot is hit in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is configured to start.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 by entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passing through the first V winning passage 427 is selected by lottery. You will be guided to area 408.

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entry detection switch 462 that detects a game ball that passes through the out passage 428 and is discharged to the outside of the internal region 401.

Further, in the upper edge portion of the tubular wall portion 431, a predetermined section in the circumferential direction including the upper portion of the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428 is extended toward the inner peripheral side of the tubular wall portion 431. The formed overhanging portion 440 is provided.

The overhanging portion 440 is configured to cover a part of each pocket portion 416 located below the overhanging portion 440 (a region about half in the radial direction of the rotating body 414) from above. As a result, another game ball rides on the upper side of the game ball that has entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and the two game balls that are vertically overlapped as they are are continuously placed on the 1st V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428. To avoid a situation in which a game ball jumps over the cylinder wall portion 431 and directly enters the pocket portion 416 at a position matching the 1st V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428 for some reason. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism portion 721 is provided at the rear portion of the rotating body unit 410. The bypass mechanism portion 721 is a movable accessory 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled to the opening accommodating portion 433 having an opening formed in the uppermost stream portion of the stage portion 432, and a movable accessory 722 for operating the movable accessory 722. It is provided with a solenoid 725 for a movable accessory as a member driving means. The solenoid 725 for a movable accessory is driven and controlled by a main control device 261 that constitutes a movable body control means.

The movable accessory 722 is assembled so as to be slidable (elevated) and displaceable in the vertical direction. Then, in the normal state when the solenoid 725 for the movable accessory is in the non-excited state, almost the entire movable accessory 722 is housed in the opening accommodating portion 433, and the upper surface thereof is substantially continuous with the upper surface of the stage portion 432. It is in a state [see FIGS. 44 (a) and 45 (a)]. The accommodation state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the non-advantageous state in the present embodiment.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 725 for the movable accessory is excited and the bypass mechanism portion 721 is in the operating state, the movable accessory 722 rises, and a part of the movable accessory 722 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432 [Fig. 44 (b), see FIG. 45 (b)]. The operation of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the predetermined operation in the present embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the advantageous state in the present embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there is a left inclined portion 727 that gently inclines downward from the substantially central portion in the left-right direction toward the left, and a right that gently inclines downward from the substantially central portion in the left-right direction toward the right. An inclined portion 728 is formed.

Then, in a normal state in which almost the entire movable accessory 722 is housed in the opening accommodating portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the central rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball derived from the 604a is guided to the left or right of the stage portion 432 by the left inclined portion 727 or the right inclined portion 728 on the upper surface of the movable accessory 722.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B, a second V winning passage 730 is provided inside the movable accessory 722. The passage width of the second V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows the game balls to pass one by one.

Then, when the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the movable accessory 722 closes the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a and the normal guide passage of the second V winning passage 730. The outlet portion 604a of 604 is in a state of facing each other [see FIGS. 44 (b) and 45 (b)]. As a result, the game ball can enter the second V winning passage 730 from the normal guide passage 604, and both passages 604 and 730 are in a communicating state.

Further, in a protruding state in which the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the outlet portion 730b of the second V winning passage 730 is relative to the inlet portion 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the back side of the central rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400. It will be in a facing state. As a result, the game ball can enter the bypass passage 737 from the second V winning passage 730, and both passages 730 and 737 are in a communicating state.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state protruding from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in a communicating state through which the game ball can pass through the second V winning passage 730.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows the game balls to pass through one by one. Further, the exit portion 737b of the bypass passage 737 opens to the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 at a position above the 15R entry port 731. As a result, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 is directly 15R without passing through the rotating body unit 410 and the type distribution mechanism portion 741 described later. You will be able to guide you to the entrance 731. That is, by operating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism unit 741.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. Then, when the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. ..

However, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the ball entry is detected by the second special entry detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not immediately started, but the game ball enters 15R. After entering the mouth 731, the jackpot state is started.

Further, when the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodated state in the state where the game ball remains in the second V winning passage 730, the remaining ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 via the lower passage 739. It is configured to be detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15) is 10 The structure is such that individual game balls are paid out. Of course, the number of game balls paid out corresponding to these ball entry detection switches is not limited to 10, and may be another number. Further, the game ball may not be paid out when the game ball is detected by these ball entry detection switches (the number of prize balls is 0).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "big hit generated when a game ball enters the 1st V winning passage 427" and "big hit generated when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. Then, it may be called "V prize jackpot".

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be described in detail. The type lottery area 408 has a 15R entrance 731 that gives a jackpot state of "15 rounds" (15 round jackpot) when a game ball enters, and "7 rounds" when a game ball enters. The 7R entrance 732, which gives the jackpot state (7 rounds jackpot), and the 3R entrance 733, which gives the jackpot state (3 rounds jackpot) of "3 rounds" when the game ball enters. It is provided. Here, the "15R entry port 731", the "7R entry port 732", and the "3R entry port 733" constitute the "type-corresponding ball entry means" in the present embodiment.

Further, the 15R ball entry port 731 is provided with a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that has entered the ball. Similarly, the 7R entry port 732 is provided with a 7R entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here, and the 3R entry port 733 is provided with a 3R that detects a game ball that has entered here. A ball entry detection switch 736 is provided.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball guided to the type lottery area 408 via the 1st V winning passage 427 and the connecting passage 429 is set to the 15R entry port 731, the 7R entry port 732, or the 3R entry port. A type sorting mechanism unit 741 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means) for sorting to any of the 733s.

The type distribution mechanism unit 741 includes a start table 742 to which the game ball led out from the exit unit 429a of the connection passage 429 is guided, a first transfer plate 744 to which the game ball is guided via the start table 742, and the like. A second transfer plate 745 that guides the game ball that has passed through the first transfer plate 744 and a 15R guide that guides the game ball that has passed through the second transfer plate 745 to the 15R entry port 731. It has a passage 746.

The start table 742 is installed in the upper left portion of the type lottery area 408, and the upper surface is inclined downward toward the right.

The first transfer plate 744 is installed to the right and slightly below the start base 742, and its left end is rotatably supported with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the right end is provided so as to be a free end. Has been done.

The rotation shaft of the first transfer plate 744 is connected to a swing mechanism portion (not shown) including a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism portion is connected by the main control device 261. By being driven and controlled, the first transfer plate 744 is configured to swing and displace vertically.

Specifically, the upper surface of the first transfer plate 744 is slightly inclined downward to the right to guide the game ball to the second transfer plate 745, and the upper surface is greatly inclined downward. , It is configured to be displaceable from the drop position that guides the game ball to the 3R entry port 733.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first transfer plate 744 via the start table 742 rolls to the right end portion of the first transfer plate 744, if the first transfer plate 744 is in the advance position, The game ball is guided to the second transfer plate 745.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the first transfer plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first transfer plate 744, if the first transfer plate 744 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball enters the 3Rs. You will be guided to the mouth 733.

That is, the first transfer plate 744 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided via the start table 742 to either the 3R entry port 733 or the second transfer plate 745.

The second transfer plate 745 is installed to the right and slightly below the first transfer plate 744, and its left end is rotatably supported with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the right end is the free end. It is provided in.

The rotation shaft of the second transfer plate 745 is connected to a swing mechanism portion (not shown) including a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swing mechanism portion is connected by the main control device 261. By being driven and controlled, the second transfer plate 745 is configured to swing and displace vertically.

Specifically, the upper surface of the second transfer plate 745 is slightly inclined downward to the right to guide the game ball to the 15R guide passage 746, and the upper surface is greatly inclined downward. It is configured to be displaceable from the drop position that guides the game ball to the 7R entry port 732.

Then, when the game ball guided by the second transfer plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second transfer plate 745, if the second transfer plate 745 is in the advance position, the game ball is in the 15R guide passage. You will be guided to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second transfer plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second transfer plate 745, if the second transfer plate 745 is in the above-mentioned drop position, the game ball enters 7R. You will be guided to mouth 732.

That is, the second transfer plate 745 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided through the first transfer plate 744 to either the 7R entry port 732 or the 15R guide passage 746.

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed on the right side and slightly downward position of the second transfer plate 745, and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the 15R entry port 731 on the right side.

In this embodiment, the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 745 are configured to swing at different cycles. For example, the first transfer plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second transfer plate 745.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the ball entry detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is performed, either the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is performed. When the ball entry detection is performed, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. In addition, when the entry detection of the 15R entry detection switch 734 is performed after the entry detection of the second special entry detection switch 738 is performed, the jackpot state corresponding to the 15 round jackpot is started. It has become.

From here, the explanation of the game board 30 is returned to. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting winning section 33a is provided at the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37. The second starting winning unit 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37.

Further, the second starting winning portion 33b is provided with a pair of opening / closing opening / closing members 33c that can be opened / closed on both side portions thereof. In the present embodiment, when the start opening opening / closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured so as to be unable to enter the second start winning portion 33b.

That is, the first start winning section 33a allows the game ball to enter at all times, whereas the second start winning section 33b is used for the entry assist lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the ball is won, the start opening opening / closing member 33c is opened, and the game ball can enter the second start winning portion 33b.

Not limited to this, when the start opening opening / closing member 33c is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning portion 33b, and when the ball is won in the entry assist lottery, the starting opening opening / closing The member 33c may be opened so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning portion 33b.

As described above, the first start winning prize 33a is provided with a first starting winning switch 224a for detecting the game ball entered therein. Similarly, the second start winning prize unit 33b is provided with a second starting winning switch 224b for detecting the game ball entered therein. Each start winning switch 224a and 224b constitutes the "starting ball detection means" in the present embodiment, respectively.

Then, as will be described in detail later, when the game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, it becomes a "hit" or a "miss" in favor of the player. A winning or losing lottery will be held.

The "hits" in the winning / failing lottery include a "small hit" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened and a "big hit" in which the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when the winning / failing lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the first starting winning prize switch 224a or the second starting winning prize switch 224b, the result of the hit / fail lottery is taught by the special display device 43 described later. The variable display and the stop display are performed.

In the present embodiment, a common winning / failing lottery is performed depending on whether the ball entry is detected by the first start winning switch 224a and the ball entry is detected by the second starting winning switch 224b. , The common special display device 43 is configured to perform the variable display, but the variable display is performed to teach the result of the winning / failing lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a. The special display device and the second special display device on which the variable display for teaching the result of the winning / failing lottery performed based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b may be provided may be separately provided. The first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second trigger entry detection means. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, each variation display is stored separately, and the corresponding variation display is digested in the order of storage or so that one is prioritized over the other. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratio of the type of jackpot state given when winning in the winning / losing lottery may be different or the same.

In the game area on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, a flow area in which the game ball can flow down is formed. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down there can pass through one by one. The flow area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be the first flow route as the first route, and the flow area on the left side may be the second flow route as the second route. Further, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 for detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second start winning portion 33b (starting opening opening / closing member 33c). Then, when the ball is won by the ball entry assist lottery, the second start winning portion 33b (starting port opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

In the upper right part of the game board 30, there is a through gate display device (ordinary symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery based on the entry into the through gate 34 (passing the ball), and each start winning section. A special display device (special symbol display device) 43 that displays the lottery results of the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into 33a and 33b, and the lottery of the operation assist lottery based on the entry into the special gate 650 (passing the ball). A special gate display device 44 for displaying the result is provided. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the through-gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps.

The configurations of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 are not particularly limited to the above configurations, and may be configured by, for example, different numbers of lamp groups, a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, and a liquid crystal display. It may be composed of different display devices such as a display device.

Further, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), a variable display (switching) for teaching the lottery result of the winning / failing lottery is performed. Display) is started, and after a predetermined time, when the variable display is stopped, the mode corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery is displayed. The first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b may be used as the first or second trigger entry means. Further, the display content of the special display device 43 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the winning / failing lottery is definitively displayed.

When a big hit is won in such a winning / losing lottery, 30 seconds of a specified time elapses after the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 A jackpot that repeats 15 times (15 rounds) with one opening and closing operation until it is closed on condition that a specified number of 8 game balls win a prize (hereinafter referred to as "direct hit jackpot"). ) Is given.

As described above, in the present embodiment, only when the "big hit" is won in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b). Instead, when a game ball enters the 1st V winning passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, or when the movable accessory 722 ( A jackpot state (V winning jackpot) also occurs when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730) and the game ball is detected by the second special entry detection switch 738.

In addition, when a game ball newly enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b) during the variable display of the special display device 43, the variable display for that amount is displayed. , It is configured to be performed after the end of the fluctuation display performed at that time. That is, the variable display of the special display device 43 is put on standby (holding). The maximum number of times this pending fluctuation display is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to a game ball that has entered the first start winning section 33a and the second starting winning section 33b. , The variable display up to a total of 4 times is suspended.

Further, the number of times of holding the variable display of the special display device 43 is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 47 for the special display device provided in the vicinity of the special display device 43. The hold lamp 47 for the special display device of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of hold lamps is taught by appropriately switching the lighting / extinguishing state of each lamp.

In addition, when a new game ball wins the start winning section 33 during a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation display for that amount is also reserved, and the fluctuation display is executed after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state. Will be done.

In the through gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a variation display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and the variation display is stopped after a predetermined time. At that time, the mode corresponding to the result of the ball entry assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is the winning result corresponding to the opening of the start opening opening / closing member 33c, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display device 41 and the variation display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening / closing member 33c is opened. Further, the display content of the through-gate display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the ball entry assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Further, when the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variation display of the through gate display device 41, the variation display for that amount is performed after the end of the variation display performed at that time. It is composed. That is, the variable display of the through-gate display device 41 is put on standby (holding). The maximum number of times the variable display is held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is the through provided in the vicinity of the through gate display device 41. It is lit and displayed by the gate hold lamp 48. The through-gate hold lamp 48 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of hold lamps is taught by appropriately switching the lighting / extinguishing state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and the variable display is stopped after a predetermined time. At that time, the mode corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. If the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is the winning result of operating the movable accessory 722, the special gate display device 44 displays the predetermined stop result and the variable display is stopped, and then the movable accessory is movable. The accessory 722 operates. Further, the display content of the special gate display device 44 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later, and the result of the operation assist lottery is definitively displayed.

As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is operated by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or the operation of the movable accessory 722. Even if it is detected, the fluctuation display (operation assist lottery result) for that amount is not suspended.

Further, an effect display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37. The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, the auxiliary display content is determined by the sub control device 262 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variation display and the lottery result displayed on the special display device 43. The display is performed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is arranged in the lower center of the game area (game board 30). Further, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and when a big hit state occurs, the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a is opened so that the game ball can win a prize in the big winning opening. It is in the open state.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 6 and the like. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally so as to be partially overlapped in the front-rear direction, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying the game balls. And a protective cover made of resin are attached. The payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack. Therefore, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, a resin frame cover 213 that covers the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 so as to project rearward. Further, a display control device 45 and a sub control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213.

The display control device 45 is housed in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The sub control device 262 is housed in the board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Further, the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33, and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning means (not shown). The game ball collected by the ball collection mechanism is guided to the discharge passage portion 217, which will be described later, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main control device 261 is mounted is rotatably supported by the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main control device 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member has a structure that cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily detect that the substrate box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a general winning switch 221 and a count switch 223 and a through gate switch 225, and a first board surface relay board (not shown) electrically connected via a cable connector. .. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and a second board surface relay board (not shown) electrically connected via a cable connector. Specifically, the second board surface relay board has an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special ball entry detection switch 462, and a round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R on). The ball detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736), the second special ball entry detection switch 738, and the special gate switch 651 are electrically connected to each other. This second board surface relay board relays various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main control device 261. Like the first board surface relay board, the second board surface relay board and the main control device 261 via a cable connector. It is electrically connected.

On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b for detecting the entry of the ball into the starting winning units 33a and 33b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

Under the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, a payout command (number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are transmitted based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225, the non-special entry detection switch 462, the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, a solenoid for opening and closing the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 by the variable winning device 32, and the second starting winning portion 33b provides a solenoid for opening and closing the large winning opening. A solenoid for opening and closing is provided to drive the opening and closing of the pair of starting opening opening and closing members 33c. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a third board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a combination of a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with the open / close axis extending in the vertical direction as the axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information on the current gaming state (big hit state, time reduction mode, etc.), a front frame set 14 detected by the open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and the inside. It is paid out from a terminal for outputting information on opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower plate full error, a tank ball no error, and a payout error, and a payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information on the number of prize balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded with, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the portion on the left side in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main control device 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism portion 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclining toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in the main power supply from the outside. There is. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball recovery mechanism described above flow in, and the game balls are placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed.

That is, the game balls that have won each winning means such as the general winning section 31 are collected via the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215, and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharging chute of the discharging passage portion 217. The out port 36 is also connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning means is also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute.

In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. You may do it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked in the front-rear direction. Has been done.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one substrate (printed circuit board).

Further, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 is housed, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

The substrate boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 protruding outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs such as a ball clogging in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 while turning on the power. Is thrown in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotated in one of them. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). This makes it difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the extension wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5). The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in the above, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right lower part of the inner frame 12 on the back side (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each have a detection unit that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main control device 261 and the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body, and when the detection unit is immersed in the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off by pressing the detection unit on the back surface of the front frame set 14 when the front frame set 14 is closed, and the detection unit returns to the protruding state when the front frame set 14 is opened. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by being pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11, and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The main control device 261 constitutes the special gaming state imparting means, the opening / closing control means, and the like in the present embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into a single chip, but may be integrated into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the data is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is used when the power is turned off (including when a power failure occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, the value of I / O, etc. (same as above). Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and conversely, restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is the main process when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Is executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311 and a sub control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, and the like, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the through-gate display device 41, the special display device 43, and the special gate display device 44 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, for convenience, various relay boards and the like are not shown, but the input / output port 505 has a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, a starting winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, and an internal ball entry detection switch 437. Various detection switches that can form predetermined detection means such as special ball entry detection switch 461,738, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switch 734, 735, 736, special gate switch 651, various boards, blades, etc. The blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, the rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, the movable accessory solenoid 725 that moves the movable accessory 722 up and down, the first transfer plate 744, and the second transfer plate 745 are swung. Various electric parts such as a motor to be operated are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output ports 505 are configured by these terminal portions and the like.

The sub control device 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, input / output port 554, bus line 555, which are memories for temporarily storing various data, etc., are provided, and other various circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission / reception circuits (not shown) are provided. It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected to the input / output port 554. Further, a speaker SP, an effect button 125, various illumination units, and lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, an effect pattern command such as a fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and displays the display on the effect display device 42. Let me. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not the hit is achieved, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub control device 262 displays whether or not the hit is achieved. , The display is performed according to the display of the special display device 43.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the CPU 511, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

In the backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power off, each register, and the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similar to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured so that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 There is a command buffer that stores the commands sent from.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set as the initial setting. It is turned off when the process is restored or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261 to recover power. These are the three payout return commands that are sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and like the payout permission flag, initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the command is returned to the previous position, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment process is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main control device 261 and the launch control device 312, the payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 is a ball lending operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. It is electrically connected to each of the machines, takes in the command of the ball lending operation by the player, and outputs it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the detection that the player is touching the handle 18 by the sensor signal, and the launch prohibition button 18a for stopping the launch ( The launching device 60 is driven on condition that (see FIG. 1) is not operated, and the game balls are launched at predetermined intervals with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to fire at intervals of about 0.6 seconds (about 100 shots per minute).

The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 42 in accordance with the instruction from the sub control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 259, and a bus line 530,531. And have. The input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP526) is executed. As a result, the display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 42, and the display content of the effect display device 42 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42. Since the VDP526 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

The power supply unit 541 supplies the necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage becomes less than 22 volt, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the control system drive voltage of 5 volt for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the resolution of the power failure), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. NS.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means draws lots using various counter information at the time of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a jackpot that opens the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening opening / closing member 32a) based on the detection of the starting winning winning switches 224a and 224b, and a central winning unit 37 (blade member 404). ) Is released. The winning / failing random number counter C1 used for the winning / failing lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small hit, and the fluctuation time selection counter used to determine the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time) performed by the special display device 43. Whether to open the second start winning unit 33b (start opening opening / closing member 33c) based on the detection of C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, and the through gate switch 225. Based on the detection of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 used for the ball entry assist random number to decide whether or not, and the special gate switch 651, the operation assist random number used for the operation assist lottery to decide whether to operate the movable accessory 722. The counter C4 is used.

The counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counter returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, and a normal fluctuation holding area for storing the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3. It is provided. Both the special variable hold area and the normal variable hold area have one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st to hold 4th areas).

Further, in each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area, the values of the winning / failing random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first and second starting winning units 33a and 33b. Stored in series. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display in the special display device 43 up to a total of four times as described above.

Further, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting such a configuration, the fluctuation display in the through-gate display device 41 can be held up to four times as described above.

Explaining each counter in detail, for example, the winning / failing random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399, reaches the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 399), and then 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the hit / fail random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the hit / miss random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the hit / miss random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 is stored in the hit / miss random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning unit 33a or the second start winning unit 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), it is stored in the winning / failing random number counter buffer. The value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

In the present embodiment, in the winning / failing lottery performed based on the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 stored in the special fluctuation holding area, any one of "small hit", "big hit", and "missing" can be obtained.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers that serve as "big hits" is one, and the value is "0". That is, the "big hit" is won with a probability of 1/400, the stop display is performed in the mode corresponding to the "big hit" (combination of lighting lamps) on the special display device 43, and a big hit state of 15 rounds occurs. It will be.

In addition, the number of random numbers that serve as "small hits" is 398, and the values are "2-399". That is, there is a probability of 398/400 to win a "small hit".

In particular, the "small hit" of the present embodiment includes a "short small hit" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds and a "long small hit" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. There is a "hit". Therefore, among the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1, "2 to 21" corresponds to "long small hit" and "22 to 399" corresponds to "short small hit".

Then, when the "short small hit" is won, the stop display is performed in the mode corresponding to the "short small hit" (combination of lighting lamps) on the special display device 43, and the blade member 404 is opened for 0.5 seconds. It will be. Further, when the "long small hit" is won, the stop display is performed in the mode corresponding to the "long small hit" (combination of lighting lamps) on the special display device 43, and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. It will be. Here, the opening / closing pattern determining means in the present embodiment is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the small hit lottery and the big hit lottery and determines the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member such as the blade member 404.

Further, among the values of the hit / miss random number counter C1, "1" is a value corresponding to "off", and in the case of "off", the mode corresponding to "off" in the special display device 43 (lighting lamp). Stop display is performed by (combination).

In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a hit / fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 corresponds to a “small hit” or a “big hit”.

Further, in the present embodiment, a gaming state is provided in which the time (variation time) of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the fluctuation display is performed four times on the special display device 43 after the end of the jackpot state. NS. It should be noted that such a gaming state ends when the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot state, even if the next jackpot state does not occur, and then the normal gaming state. Return to.

Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 is shortened is referred to as a "time reduction mode", and the normal gaming state in which the normal fluctuation display in which the fluctuation time is not shortened is performed is referred to as a "normal mode". The specific fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Further, in the "time reduction mode", the start opening opening / closing member 33c of the second start winning section 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the game ball is easily entered into the second start winning section 33b in the "high entry state". It becomes. As a result, the start opening opening / closing member 33c is hardly opened, and the "time reduction mode" is compared with the "normal mode" in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second start winning portion 33b in the "low ball entry state". , It is easy to let the game ball enter the second start winning portion 33b.

Specifically, in the "normal mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34 is 10 seconds. , The opening time of the starting port opening / closing member 33c when the ball is won by the ball entry assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the start port opening / closing member 33c when the ball entry assist lottery is won is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the start port opening / closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time zone in which the start opening opening / closing member 33c is in the open state becomes longer, the game balls are frequently entered into the second start winning portion 33b, and the winning / failing lottery is continuously performed. It will be in a good condition for ball holding.

In this way, in the "time reduction mode", when the holding fluctuation display of the special display device 43 continuously wins a small hit (after closing the blade member 404 once and performing the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display is performed. Although the flow of opening is the same, the blade member 404 is opened substantially continuously (in quick succession) (because the fluctuation time is short). Therefore, it is easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" or a "small hit (short small hit and long small hit)" in a winning / failing lottery based on a ball entering the starting winning section 33, and a "small hit (short)" The opening time of the blade member 404 when "small hit and long small hit)" occurs is the same in all modes (time reduction mode and normal mode).

In addition, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 will be determined. It is the same in the mode of.

The fluctuation time selection counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, to reach the upper limit value (that is, 9) and then return to the lower limit value of 0. The fluctuation time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the fluctuation time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer is displayed. The stored value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 when a "small hit" is made in the winning / losing lottery in the "normal mode" is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds". The fluctuation time selection table referred to when determining whether the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 corresponds to "2-second fluctuation" or "3-second fluctuation" is stored in ROM 502 in advance.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the case of "big hit" or "missing" in the winning / losing lottery in the "normal mode" is "7 seconds".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the winning / losing lottery ("small hit", "big hit" or "missing"). ..

The size and range of each counter are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the hit / fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 9, the upper limit value (that is, 9) is reached, and then the value returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The ball entry assist random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. NS.

Normally, the number of winning random numbers is eight, and the range is "1 to 8". Then, when the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, after the fluctuation display is performed on the through gate display device 41 for a predetermined time, the ball is stopped in a mode corresponding to winning or losing (combination of lighting lamps). The display is performed, and if a winner is won, the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined time.

Further, the operation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. The operation assist random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Normally, the number of winning random numbers is 15, and the range is "1 to 15". Then, when the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, after the variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 for a predetermined time, the stop display is performed in a mode corresponding to winning or losing (combination of lighting lamps). If the event is won, the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism unit 721 will be in a protruding state for a predetermined time. Therefore, the operation assist lottery constitutes the operation lottery process in the present embodiment, and the "lottery process execution means" and the "state lottery means" are configured by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the operation assist lottery.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of. For convenience of explanation, here, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then the main processing will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information is saved. When the game ball is paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added to end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the present process is terminated as it is. In the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, the random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Further, in step S303, the random number update process is executed. Specifically, the hit / fail random number counter C1, the fluctuation time selection counter C2, the ball entry assist random number counter C3, and the operation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, respectively). When it reaches "399", "9", "9", "19"), it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process accompanying the winning of the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b) is executed, and in step S305, the game ball passes through the through gate 34. In step S306, the through-gate passage process associated with the above is executed, and the entry count process associated with the entry of the central winning unit 37 into the internal region 401 is executed.

In the following step S307, detection by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 (ball entry into the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. (The ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730 of the movable accessory 722), and the special winning process is executed.

Further, in step S308, a non-special winning process accompanying detection by the non-special entry detection switch 462 (entry into the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414) is executed, and in step S309. , The special gate passage process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the special gate 650 is executed.

After that, in step S310, the type entry process accompanying the detection by the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736 (entry into the 15R entry port 731, 7R entry port 732, 3R entry port 733) is executed. , Timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area, a hit / fail random number storage area for storing the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area for storing the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2, and a held fluctuation A start winning prize determination flag is provided for determining whether or not the display is based on the ball entering the start winning unit 33 of either the first starting winning unit 33a or the second starting winning unit 33b.

Further, in the special fluctuation holding area in the present embodiment, apart from the area for storing the values of the above-mentioned winning / failing random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, in the winning / failing lottery based on the entry into the starting winning unit 33, a “big hit” is obtained. A big hit occurrence flag indicating that the player has won the game, a miss flag indicating that the player has lost the game, a long small hit flag indicating that the player has won the "long small hit", and a short flag indicating that the player has won the "short small hit". A small hit generation flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second fluctuation flag, a 3-second fluctuation flag, and a 7-second fluctuation flag indicating the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first and second start winning units 33a and 33b is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, " 4 ”) It is determined whether or not it is less than. If a negative determination is made in step S501, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning prize unit 33a based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the pass / fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in the first vacant hold area of the special fluctuation hold area.

In step S505, the start winning determination flag of the holding area in which each value of the hit / fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored is turned on. The start winning determination flag of the present embodiment is set to ON when the held variation display is based on the entry into the first start winning section 33a, and the start winning decision flag is set to enter the second start winning section 33b. Set off if it is based.

In the following step S506, a hit / fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the “small hit” or the “big hit”. The details of the pass / fail determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, a fluctuation time determination process for determining the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

After that, in step S508, the starting command setting process is performed. In the starting command, the hold-stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of the fluctuation display) is used to enter either the first start winning unit 33a or the second start winning unit 33b. Information indicating whether it is based on fluctuation information, information indicating "small hit" or "big hit", information indicating fluctuation time, etc. are included and output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). Will be done.

Here, the details of the pass / fail determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the type of small hit (long small hit, short small hit) is also determined in the hit / fail determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches the value “0” corresponding to the “big hit”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, does the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area match "1", which is a value corresponding to "off" in step S5103? Determine if not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be "off", the off flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be a "small hit", the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5105 is "long small". It is determined whether or not it matches any of "2 to 21" which is a value corresponding to "hit". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit generation flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined to be a "short small hit", the short small hit generation flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process ends.

Next, the fluctuation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is used. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1 second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special display device 43 is 0.1 second is set to on. , End this process. That is, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation display is uniformly 0.1 seconds regardless of whether the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit, a long small hit, a short small hit, or a miss.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag is set in the hit / fail determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, that is, if it is determined to be a "long small hit", the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5204 is "0". It is determined whether or not it matches with either of "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is any of "2 to 9", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special display device 43 in step S5205. After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that is 3 seconds, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this process is performed. finish.

If a negative determination is made in step S5203, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short small hit occurrence flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, when a "short small hit" occurs, the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is "0, 1" in step S5208. It is determined whether or not it matches with either of.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is set to 3 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 is set to 2 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, it is more likely that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected when a "long small hit" occurs than when a "short small hit" occurs.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, in the case of "big hit" or "missing", it is shown in step S5209 that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special display device 43 is 7 seconds. After turning on the second fluctuation flag, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the processing of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning unit 33b is determined by the second start. It is determined by the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, the hold counter Na is incremented by 1 in step S510.

In the following step S511, the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored in the first vacant holding area of the special fluctuation holding area. In step S512, a hit / fail determination process is performed. The hit / fail determination process in step S512 is the same as the pass / fail determination process in step S506, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S513, the fluctuation time determination process is performed. The hit / fail determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, the starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through-gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending fluctuation displays performed by the through gate display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc to be performed is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, on the condition that the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S603 and the normal hold is performed. The counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the following step S604, a random number related to the result is acquired. Specifically, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passing process is completed.

Next, the ball entry count process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, the game ball enters the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37 by determining whether or not the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the entrance portion 601b of the introduction passage 601 is detected. Determine if it has been done. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, in step S7202, a ball entry command for notifying the sub control device 262 that the game ball has entered the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37 is set. When a ball entry command is received on the sub control device 262 side, a ball entry sound effect is output and a ball entry lamp (not shown) is lit / blinked to indicate to the player that the ball has entered. It is configured to notify you.

After that, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is added by 1. In the following step S7204, the setting process of the monitoring timer, which is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process, is performed. In the present embodiment, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer every time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected. Further, even if a predetermined value is already set in the monitoring timer, "10000" is overwritten. The monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in the normal process (remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 described later) performed every 4 mec. After the step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the game ball by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, in step S7302, the jackpot middle flag, which will be described later, is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the jackpot is in the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the jackpot state, when the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461. , Even if the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730) and the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the amount is increased. The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, a special winning flag indicating that the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 has been detected in step S7303 has already been set. Determine if it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the state where it has already been decided to generate the jackpot state (the right to generate the jackpot state is granted), the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 is repeated. Even if the ball entry is detected, the jackpot for that amount is invalid.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then this process ends.

In the present embodiment, at the stage when the ball entry detection of the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is performed, only the right to generate the jackpot state is granted, and which type of jackpot state is granted. Since it has not been decided until, the jackpot state is not started until the type is decided.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 is detected, the game ball is still in the 15R ball entry port 731, only with the right to generate a jackpot state. Since there is no such state, the jackpot state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R entrance 731 and the "15 round jackpot" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of the game ball by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is discharged to the outside of the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) via the out passage 428. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7402, and then this process ends.

Next, the special gate passing process in step S309 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S7501, whether or not the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 is determined by the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, in step S7502, whether or not the third display flag described later is on, that is, the special gate The display device 44 determines whether or not variable display is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7502, in step S7503, whether or not the accessory operating flag described later is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is operating (protruding state). To determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, the present process is terminated as it is.

As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or the operation of the movable accessory 722, the amount of the game ball is increased. The operation assist lottery is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7503, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the predetermined operation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503 in step S7504. do.

In the following step S7505, the special gate passage flag is turned on, and in step S7506, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, the type entry process in step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special winning flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the entry detection of the 15R entry detection switch 734 has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is 15 rounds is turned on in step S7603. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the entry detection of the 7R entry detection switch 735 has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the 7 round jackpot is set is turned on in step S7606. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the entry detection of the 3R entry detection switch 736 has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is 3 rounds is turned on in step S7609. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and in step S401, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt process is performed. finish.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state. Wait processing is executed for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, in the subsequent step S104, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so that the process proceeds to step S111 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the following step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off. That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process proceeds to step S111 in this case as well.

In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262 and the payout control device 311 which are the control devices on the sub side. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 or the like). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112 or the like). Further, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112 or the like) in the same manner. That is, in step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. In addition, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of power failure restoration) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power off is restored, and in step S108, the power off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S212 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43, the second start winning unit 33b, etc. updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each device on the sub side. Executes external output processing such as sending to the control device.

For example, when the effect display device 42 starts the variation display, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command is a command signal output to the sub control device 262 in order for the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect according to the display performed by the special display device 43. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the display mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and displays the display mode on the effect display device 42. Give instructions to.

On the other hand, when the variation display in the effect display device 42 is stopped, a confirmation command is transmitted to the sub control device 262. On the other hand, the sub control device 262 that has input the confirmation command gives an instruction to the display control device 45 in order to end the variation display (display effect) performed by the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the jackpot state is in progress, or when the jackpot state is granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. In the case of (during a small hit state), the special display device 43 is tentatively configured so that the subtraction process of the first display timer for measuring the fluctuation time is not performed (see FIG. 23). When the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 is detected during the fluctuation display of the (effect display device 42) and the special prize flag is turned on, the special prize is won. The confirmation command is not transmitted to the sub-control device 262 until the V-winning jackpot related to the flag is completed, and is transmitted after the jackpot is completed.

In step S202, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the following step S204, the V winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, the game ball that has entered the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball is the first. The game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the special ball entry detection switch 461 and the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and the game ball enters the bypass passage 737, and the game ball enters the second special ball entry detection switch 738. The jackpot that occurs based on the detection is made. The details of this V winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43, the control content of the special display device 43 is set, and the hit determination and the effect pattern on the effect display device 42 are set. The details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, the variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 and the control content of the variable winning device 32 are set. As a result, when the jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening / closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, the blade member opening / closing process is executed. In this process, the control content of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 is set. The details of the blade member opening / closing process will be described later.

In step S208, the second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control content of the through-gate display device 41, and the like are set. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, the start winning unit control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the start opening opening / closing member 33c of the second start winning portion 33b is set. The details of the start winning unit control process will be described later.

In step S210, the third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is performed on the special gate display device 44, the control content of the special gate display device 44, and the like are set. The details of this third display control process will be described later. The display control means in the present embodiment is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that executes the third display control process.

In step S211, the accessory drive control process related to the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this process, a drive control process related to the rotating body unit 410, a drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721, a drive control process related to the type distribution mechanism unit 741 and the like are performed.

For example, in the drive control process related to the rotating body unit 410, control such as rotating the rotating body 414 in a counterclockwise direction at a constant speed is performed, and in the drive control process related to the type sorting mechanism unit 741, the first passing is performed. Controls such as swinging the plate 744 and the second transfer plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm are performed.

Further, in the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism unit 721, control such as projecting the movable accessory 722 when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. The details of the drive control process (hereinafter referred to as "bypass mechanism control process") related to the bypass mechanism unit 721 will be described later.

In step S212, the remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process of confirming whether or not the game ball exists in the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. The details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

After that, in step S213, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S214, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal process (the present embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215 to update the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. Then, after this process, the process proceeds to step S213. That is, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing at the time of determination in step S214, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time.

If the power outage occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processes after step S216 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. Be struck. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S216, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S217, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in the backup area 503a in step S218. Remember in. After that, in step S219, a power off notification command indicating that the power is cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S220 and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

The process of step S213 is a timing at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in steps S201 to S212, or at the end of one cycle of the process of step S215 performed within the remaining time. Is running on. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than that in the case where each processing is in progress. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Further, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power is cut off can be reliably stored. ..

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1501, whether the special winning flag (see the special winning process of FIG. 18) indicating that the game ball has been detected by the first special ball detection switch 461 or the second special ball detection switch 738 is turned on. Determine if not. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503, and it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, "15" is set in the round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state, and then the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special winning flag is turned off, and the jackpot middle flag indicating that the jackpot state is in progress is set on. After that, in the following step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 is being controlled is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to ". 7500 ”is set, and in step S1508,“ 8 ”is set in the winning counter, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1510, and then the process proceeds to step S1505, and the same processing as described above is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, after setting "3" in the round number counter in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S1505, and the same processing as described above is performed.

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, the jackpot middle flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If the affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot state is in progress, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, in the jackpot state, the fluctuation display is not newly started, and the fluctuation display that has already been started is not terminated.

The jackpot state includes the middle of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening period before the start of the jackpot state, and the ending period after the end of the jackpot state. Generally, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in the manner corresponding to the jackpot on the special display device 43 to when the first opening is started on the variable winning device 32). The effect display device 42 displays a display notifying the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (a predetermined period after the opening of the final round is completed by the variable winning device 32), the effect display device 42 displays the end of the big hit state and the mode given after the big hit.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag is on. The special winning flag is set on when a game ball is detected by the first special winning detection switch 461 or the second special winning detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and the jackpot middle flag is set. It is turned off when it is turned on (see step S1505 of the V winning jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the present process is terminated as it is. In other words, in the state where the right to generate the jackpot state is granted but the jackpot state has not been started yet, the fluctuation display is not newly started and the fluctuation display that has already been started is not terminated. ..

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the small hit opening flag is set to ON. As will be described in detail later, the small hit opening flag is turned on during the state in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, in the small hit state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the present process is terminated as it is. That is, while the central winning unit 37 is open (in the small hit state), the fluctuation display is not newly started, and the fluctuation display that has already been started is not terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, in step S804, the setting status of the first display flag is observed, and it is determined whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display. When the first display flag is set to on, it is considered that the variable display is in progress, and when the first display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is not performed. As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed (see step S808). It is turned off in step S812).

Then, when a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, neither is the jackpot state nor the jackpot state is granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is open (small hit). If it is neither in the state) nor in the variable display of the special display device 43, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold of the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the start winning unit 33 is set. Determine if it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no variation display is held and stored, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, when even one variation display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

In the following step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the special variable hold area in order to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → execution area and hold 2nd area → hold. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on hold → the third area on hold. In the shift process, not only the values of the hit / fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, but also the jackpot generation flag, the miss flag, the long small hit generation flag, the short small hit generation flag, the short small hit generation flag, the 2 second fluctuation flag, and the 3 seconds. The setting state of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag on / off is also shifted.

In the following step S808, the variable display setting process is performed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation information corresponds to the "big hit" by determining whether or not the jackpot generation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. As a modified example, in the same manner as the winning / failing determination process of the start winning process, the winning / failing determination table is referred to again, and the value of the winning / failing random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to the jackpot. It may be determined whether or not it is "0".

If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, that is, if a "big hit" is won in the winning / failing lottery, a direct hit indicating that the "big hit" was won in the winning / failing lottery ("direct hit jackpot") in step S902. Turn on the jackpot flag. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON.

If affirmative determination is made in step S903, in step S904, a fluctuation pattern command for determining a fluctuation pattern (big hit fluctuation pattern) to be a jackpot and further transmitting the fluctuation pattern (variation information) to the sub control device 262. Set. In the following step S905, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a fluctuation pattern (big hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes a big hit is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined by the sub control device. The variation pattern command is set so that it can be transmitted to 262 as well. In the following step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S908 whether or not it is "out of alignment" by determining whether or not the deviation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. As a modification, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / miss random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1" by determining whether or not the value is "1" in the same manner as the hit / miss judgment process of the start winning process. It may be determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is "off", it is determined in step S909 whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation hold area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, a fluctuation pattern command to be deviated (disengaged fluctuation pattern) is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern command is set so as to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub control device 262. I do. After that, in step S911, the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer, and then the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern (disengagement shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes an deviation is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined by the sub control device. The variation pattern command is set so that it can be transmitted to 262 as well. In the following step S913, the value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for the fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade release flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is on. As a modified example, in the same manner as the winning / failing determination process of the start winning process, it is determined once again whether or not the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any of "2 to 21". It may be determined whether or not the player has won the "long small hit".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "long small hit", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, in step S917, a variation pattern (long small hit 3 seconds) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 3 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S919, "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the open / close control timer used for opening / closing control of the blade member 404. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 3 seconds. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43 (long small hit 2 seconds). The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S923, "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the fluctuation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a long small hit is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information). Is set to the fluctuation pattern command so as to be transmitted to the sub control device 262 as well.

In the following step S925, the value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S926, "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 0.1 second. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "short small hit", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the variation display for 3 seconds is performed by the special display device 43 (short small hit 3 seconds). The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S930, "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set for the open / close control timer used for opening / closing control of the blade member 404. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 3 seconds. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S927, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S931, in step S932, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit 2 seconds) in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds after the fluctuation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. The variation pattern) is determined, and the variation pattern command is set so that the variation pattern is also transmitted to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S933, the value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S934, "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the fluctuation display for 2 seconds is performed by the special display device 43. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time to result in a short small hit is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information). Is set to the fluctuation pattern command so as to be transmitted to the sub control device 262 as well.

In the following step S936, the value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer. Further, in step S937, "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the open / close control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the fluctuation display for 0.1 second. After that, the process proceeds to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing variable display is turned on. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, when the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S809 to perform the first display timer subtraction process. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S810, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, step S810 is positively determined when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 is performed, and this process ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of the lamps to be turned on is set to be sequentially switched. As a result, the timing of the first display control process, that is, the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 is realized every 4 msec.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S810, that is, when the stop timing of the variation display in the special display device 43 is reached, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is to be displayed is output to the special display device 43 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a "big hit", the plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to the "big hit", and the lamp is "off". In the case, the stop display is displayed in the mode corresponding to "off", in the case of "long small hit", the stop display is displayed in the mode corresponding to "long small hit", and in the case of "short small hit". Stop display in a mode corresponding to "short small hit".

Further, in the stop display setting process according to step S813, a setting process for transmitting a confirmation command to the effect display device 42 to display the stop display is performed to the sub control device 262.

Then, in the following step S814, after performing the discrimination information setting process, this process ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit jackpot flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the winning / failing lottery, the jackpot setting after step S1002 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, the jackpot flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state as the special game state is being set is turned on. In the following step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is turned on. In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1004, the first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and indicates whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of opening, is set. In this example, "7500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time per round (the maximum time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) becomes 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state occurs, that is, the number of times the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is executed) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to the "direct hit jackpot".

In the following step S1006, a winning counter setting process for counting the number of game balls entered in the variable winning device 32 is performed. In this example, "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set as a value. After that, this process ends. In the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see step S301 in FIG. 11), it is determined from the detection information of the count switch 223 whether or not the ball has entered the variable winning device 32, and the ball has entered the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is, the value of the winning counter is decremented by 1.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning / losing lottery, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter is set. The fluctuation number counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In the present embodiment, in the time reduction mode, after the jackpot state ends, the special display device 43 performs the variable display four times, and as will be described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the jackpot ends. ..

Here, when the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is "0", the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuation count counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation count counter is subtracted by 1. Move to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display this time is the fourth fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is given). Here, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is "0", the process of turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, the process of turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation count counter is not "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1201, the jackpot hit flag is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is hit. If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is.

If affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the count value of the first variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204 to determine whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is “0”. That is, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, is left.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 has reached the specified number per round (8 in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable winning device 32 (timing at the end of the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1206 to determine whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the end setting process is performed in step S1207 to end this process. The details of the end setting process will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number of times, the round feed process is performed in step S1208, and this process ends. In the round feed process, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1. That is, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeated until the number of executed rounds reaches a preset predetermined number of times. Further, in the round feed process, the first variable flag is turned off, and the wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set in the first variable timer.

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, during the interval period between rounds, the process proceeds to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". ..

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, when the interval period ends and the timing to start the next round is reached, the round start process is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (“7500” in this example) is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set. Set the maximum number of winnings per round ("8" in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Based on the on / off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal indicating that the variable winning device 32 is released is output, and the variable winning device 32 is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal indicating that the variable winning device 32 is closed is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

Here, the end setting process of step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot middle flag is turned off. Then, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is turned on. That is, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state of all the jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot" and "V winning jackpot" ("15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot"). , It is configured to give a time saving mode.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, "4" is set in the fluctuation count counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the jackpot ends, the time reduction mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, a process of turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening / closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade release flag (see step S914 of the variation display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the small hit opening flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be opened from now on by winning a "small hit", the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close control timer is “0”. As described above, when it is determined that the "small hit" is won in the variation display setting process, it corresponds to the same time as the variation time of the variation display performed by the special display device 43 for the open / close control timer. The value to be set is set (see step S919, step S923, step S926, step S930, step S934, and step S937). Therefore, at the same time as the end of the corresponding variation display, a positive determination is made in the determination.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the open / close control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, when the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit opening flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. Performs the process of opening.

After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the open / close control timer in step S1808, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the open / close control timer in step S1809, and this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open / close control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the open / close control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, when the timing for closing the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit opening flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade opening flag is set in step S1813. It is turned off, and in step S1814, a process of closing the blade member 404 is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the second display control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, the fluctuation display (switching display) by the through gate display device 41 is being performed by observing the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation display is being performed by the through gate display device 41. Determine if it is. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the through gate display device 41 is considered to be performing variable display. It is considered that the stop display is in progress, which corresponds to the state in which the fluctuation display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if the fluctuation display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the normal variable hold area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas in order to the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S2105, the start setting process is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the condition for performing the variable display (switching display) is satisfied in the through-gate display device 41. Specifically, the second display timer is turned on and the second display timer is set. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the through-gate display device 41, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. It will be taken into consideration.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the through-gate display device 41 is different between the time reduction mode in which the ball is in a high ball entry state and the normal mode. In the time reduction mode, the second display timer is used. A value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the second display timer. In the jackpot state, "1250" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

Then, after the end of step S2105, the second display control process ends. If a control signal to start variable display (switching display) is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, The variable display (switching display) is started on the through-gate display device 41.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the through-gate display device 41 is displaying fluctuations, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform the second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and the stop display setting for displaying the stop on the through-gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the player has won based on the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area. Specifically, "1 to 8" out of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is the winning value.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process is completed. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening / closing the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening / closing member 33c) is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning unit 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening start. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning portion 33b (starting port opening / closing member 33c) is different between the time reduction mode in which the ball is in a high ball entry state and the normal mode, and the second variable in the time reduction mode. A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the timer, and a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer in the normal mode. In the jackpot state, "100" is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of the lamps to be turned on is set to be sequentially switched. As a result, the timing of the second display control process, that is, the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41 is realized every 4 msec.

Next, the start winning unit control process in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second start winning portion 33b (starting port opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning unit 33b is in the closed state), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is considered that the second start winning unit 33b is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is subtracted by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, step S2203 is positively determined when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes “0”. If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, the end setting process is performed in step S2204, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Based on the on / off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the second start winning unit 33b in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the start opening opening / closing member 33c is output to the second start winning section 33b (solenoid for the starting port), and the second starting winning section 33b is in the open state. Become. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the start opening opening / closing member 33c is output to the second start winning portion 33b, and the second start winning portion 33b is closed.

Next, the third display control process in step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, the variation display (switching display) by the special gate display device 44 is being performed by observing the setting status of the third display flag indicating whether or not the variation display is being performed on the special gate display device 44. Determine if it is. Specifically, when the third display flag is on, it is considered that the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, and when the third display flag is off, the special gate display device 44 is considered to be in variable display. It is considered that the stop display is in progress, which corresponds to the state in which the fluctuation display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302 to determine whether or not the special gate passage flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the special gate passage flag is not on, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation display is not displayed and the special gate passage flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2303 and the special gate passage flag is turned off. In the following step S2304, the start setting process is executed. In this process, the special gate display device 44 performs a process indicating that the condition for performing the variable display (switching display) is satisfied. Specifically, the third display timer is turned on and the third display timer is set. The third display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. It will be taken into consideration.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is uniformly set to 1 second regardless of whether the game state is the time reduction mode or the normal mode, which is equivalent to 1 second with respect to the third display timer. The value "250" is set.

Then, after the end of step S2304, the third display control process ends. If a control signal to start variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, The variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44.

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2301, that is, when the variable display is being displayed on the special gate display device 44, the process proceeds to step S2306 to perform the third display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2307, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and the stop display setting for displaying the stop on the special gate display device 44 is performed in step S2309. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output process in the next normal process.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is achieved based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the operation assist random number storage area. Specifically, "1 to 15" out of the numerical values 0 to 19 of the operation assist random number counter C4 is a winning value.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2310, the discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process is completed. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to the winning, the setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism unit 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on, and the operating time is set in the accessory operation timer.

The accessory operating flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is operating.

The accessory operation timer is a means for measuring the operation time (remaining time) of the movable accessory 722, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of operation. In the present embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory operation timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2307, in step S2111, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 is performed, and this process is terminated. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal indicating that the switching display is performed is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of the lamps to be turned on is set to be sequentially switched. As a result, the timing of the third display control process, that is, the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 is realized every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the accessory drive control process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the accessory operating flag indicating whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state is on. Here, if it is determined that the accessory operating flag is not on (the movable accessory 722 is in the housed state), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if the accessory operating flag is on, it is considered that the movable accessory 722 is in the protruding state, and the accessory operation timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the accessory operation timer is subtracted by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether or not the specified protrusion time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the accessory operation timer after the subtraction. Here, step S2403 is positively determined when the specified protrusion time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the accessory operation timer becomes “0”. If a negative determination is made here, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404, the end setting process is performed in step S2404, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step S2404, a process of turning off the accessory operating flag is performed.

It should be noted that, based on the on / off status of the accessory operating flag, various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (movable accessory solenoid 725) in the next external output process of the normal process. When the accessory operating flag is on, a drive signal for exciting the movable accessory solenoid 725 is output, and the movable accessory 722 is in the protruding state. On the other hand, when the accessory operating flag is off, a drive signal for de-energizing the movable accessory solenoid 725 is output, and the movable accessory 722 is in the accommodated state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S7101, in order to specify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0".

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch. 1 is subtracted based on the detection of the 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736 and the special gate switch 651.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if no game ball remains in the internal area 401, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball last entered the internal area 401. Determines whether or not is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7103, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer when the ball enters the internal area 401. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball enters the internal area 401. Further, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the internal region 401 to when it is discharged (specifically, after the game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the game ball is released. Non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or time until detection by special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds. It is seconds.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the internal region 401 to when it is discharged is significantly elapsed, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter becomes " If it does not become "0", it is considered that a ball clogging has occurred in the internal area 401, and an error notification process is performed in step S7104. For example, the error display lamp 104 is turned on, an error notification sound is output, and control such as prohibiting the firing of a game ball is performed. After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 34, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the payout control device 311 temporarily waits for another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the receive interrupt process is executed. When the receive interrupt process is executed, first, the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3001 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in order to store the command transmitted from the main control unit 261 in step S3002. Turn on the command reception flag to end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, the timer shown in FIG. 36. In the interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 and the command is commanded. The reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may be shifted to the command determination process. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First of all, in step S3101, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and the interrupt mode is set. Then, in the following step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, the external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the backup area 513a is set with power-off occurrence information, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, does the RAM determination value match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off? Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the initialization process of RAM 513 after step S3115 is performed. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to allow interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the processing at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery). Process) is executed. That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power is turned off is restored, in step S3110, the power cut occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of the prize ball is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the initial setting of the CPU peripheral device is performed, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is enabled in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power cutout occurrence information is set, the power supply is cut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process when the power is turned off. In the power failure processing, first, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination processing described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127, and the backup area 513a is calculated. The RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

In the process of step S3122, since the information on the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed after the process performed at the time of turning on the power is completed, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is larger than that in the case where each process is in the middle. It is less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power is cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily returned and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the determination processing of the command is performed.

Here, the command determination process in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main control unit 261 is received in the reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) described above.

If the command reception flag is determined to be off in step S3301, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of the command read from the RAM 513 in the processes of steps S3304 to S3306 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is a prize ball command. Whether or not it is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main control unit is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the initialization timing being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the prize ball can be surely set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, the command determination process ends without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, the prize balls will not be paid out if they remain. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being inflicted with a loss.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to allow the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the number of prize balls received in step S3310 is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , The payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command instructing the payout of the prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so that the prize ball can be paid out at an early stage for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so that the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Note that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO). The command judgment process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 36 will be returned to the description. When the command determination process is completed, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this process ends as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state is determined when the state return operation is started. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, the payout motor is clogged with balls, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions, and the ball clogging can be eliminated (return to the normal state). ..

After that, in step S3205, the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed when the lower plate is full, and the lower plate is not full when the lower plate is not full. Perform state setting. Further, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball-less state (ball out state) or the tank ball-less release state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, and the setting of the state without a tank ball and the state without a tank ball is executed. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the notification is made.

Subsequently, the payout control process of the prize ball and the rental ball is executed. Specifically, the payout quantity setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal operation is not started and the ball removal operation is not started. In the following step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibe motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a jammed state. After that, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 38. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the start to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all the storage areas, the start of the storage area is used. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on the respective pointers.

In the following step S3903, the hold information storage process for storing the fluctuation information included in the starting command in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. As described above, the starting command has a variable display triggered by entering the starting winning section 33 of either the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b (starting winning determination flag). Information indicating (setting), information indicating whether it is fluctuation information corresponding to a big hit (setting of a big hit occurrence flag), and whether it is a fluctuation display corresponding to a long small hit or a short small hit (long small hit occurrence flag or short small) Information indicating the hit occurrence flag setting), information indicating whether or not the fluctuation display corresponds to the deviation (setting of the deviation flag), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display (2 seconds fluctuation flag, 3 seconds fluctuation flag, 7 seconds fluctuation) Information indicating the flag, setting of the 0.1-second fluctuation flag) is included.

Further, the hold information storage area includes four hold areas (hold first to hold fourth areas) and one execution area, similarly to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. In the hold information storage area, the change information included in the start command is stored in chronological order according to the reception history of the start command based on the change display (information stored in the special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 can be grasped by the sub control device 262 as well.

Here, the hold information storage process in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the hold counter Np that counts the number of hold of variable information held and stored in the hold information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the fluctuation information including the information on whether or not it is a big hit, the information on whether or not it is a small hit, the information on the fluctuation time, etc. included in the starting command is the first of the vacant hold areas in the hold information storage area. Store in the area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used for determining the effect display content are acquired, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the fluctuation information is stored.

After the processing of step S4104, or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, and whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553). Whether or not) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4105, the value of the hold counter Np is subtracted by 1 in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the hold information storage area to the execution area side, and is the first hold area → the execution area. , 2nd hold area → 1st hold area, 3rd hold area → 2nd hold area, 4th hold area → 3rd hold area, and so on.

After performing the process of step S4107, or when a negative determination is made in step S4105, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 38, if a negative determination is made after step S3903 or in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3911.

In step S3905, various counter update processes used for determining the effect display content are executed. In the following step S3906, the display setting process is performed. Here, basically, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 when the variation pattern command is received. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various production types (variation types) with fluctuation pattern commands.

The display command is, for example, a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for designating a display effect during a jackpot, and is information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. The required display command is generated each time based on. Normally, the display commands related to the fluctuation display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly classified into a normal fluctuation data group and a reach effect data group, and basically each data constituting these data groups is the above-mentioned fluctuation time timer. By sequentially outputting in accordance with a predetermined time order based on the above, display effects according to various fluctuation patterns are performed. For example, the normal fluctuation data group consists of normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2, ..., Normal fluctuation data m, and the reach effect data group consists of reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2, ..., Reach effect data. In the case of n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, followed by reach production data 1 → 2 → with the start of reach production. ... → Data is output in the order of n.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variable display or the like on the effect display device 42. Once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the effect display is continued in cooperation with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the confirmation command is received. Then, when the confirmation command is received, the variation display on the effect display device 42 is stopped.

Further, in step S3906, it is also confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 is operated, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, the setting is performed accordingly. Further, in the present embodiment, when "4" is set in the fluctuation count counter in the end setting process or when the value of the fluctuation counter is subtracted by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command including that fact is mainly used. It is output from the control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times in the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, when the sub-control device 262 receives an operation warning command output from the main control device 261 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, the movable accessory 722 operates. It may be configured to perform an operation notice effect for notifying that it is a fierce heat time.

For example, the movable accessory 722 is better when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 at what timing by the effect of notifying that the movable accessory 722 is activated after a few seconds or by the route distribution member 603. An effect such as notifying that the operation is performed at the timing is performed.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamp / illuminations is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice such as notification of error occurrence are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also made in step S3908.

In step S3909, a demo screen is set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses in a state where the customer waiting effect (for example, the effect display device 42 does not perform the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43). Perform other processing such as control settings for display).

In step 3910, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to 3909 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 is made to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3911 and whether or not the power off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. To determine. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

If the power failure occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3912, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power off occurrence information is stored, the power off process is executed in step S3913. In the power off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased. After executing the power off processing, the processing loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched in the game area enters the start winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b) and When a small hit is won in the winning / losing lottery based on the winning ball, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball entry opening 403 is opened for a predetermined time.

Then, when the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the game ball that has entered the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 falls through the introduction passage 601 through the fall passage 602. You will be guided to.

The game ball that has fallen down the fall passage 602 can guide its destination to the normal guide passage 604 that can be guided to the winning / failing lottery area 407 by the route distribution member 603, or the special guidance passage 605 that can guide the destination to the accessory operation lottery area 409. It is distributed to.

However, since the route distribution member 603 is normally tilted to the right and the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, the game ball falling down the fall passage 602 is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. It will be taken.

Then, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined time due to the force received from the contacting game ball. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the fall passage 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide passage 605.

The game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 is guided to the winning / losing lottery area 407, and its destination is distributed by the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

After that, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408 and used to determine the jackpot type. Then, after the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state is started.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 is guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650. Then, when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an operation assist lottery is performed, and when the operation assist lottery is won, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state and protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in a communicating state via the second V winning passage 730 in the movable accessory 722.

Then, when a game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable accessory 722 is operating, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737, and the game ball is detected by the second special entry detection switch 738. By doing so, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted.

After that, when the game ball enters the 15R entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot is started.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (protruding state), the game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 directly enters 15R without going through the rotating body unit 410 and the type distribution mechanism unit 741. You will be guided to the ball mouth 731.

Hereinafter, the main effects of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, by providing the movable accessory 722 in the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region 401. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the expectation of the occurrence of the V prize jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the operation assist determines whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722. A lottery is performed, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate when the operation assist lottery is won.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not move regularly or continuously at all times, and does not operate every time when the ball entry is detected by the special gate switch 651. Therefore, the movable accessory 722 is related to the movable accessory 722. It is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect and raise the player's expectation that the movable accessory 722 operates.

Further, by providing the trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) for detecting the operation trigger of the movable accessory 722 in the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37, based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal region 401, Since it is determined whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, the player has come to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further improving the interest. Can be planned.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged to the outside of the internal region 401, and cannot flow down to the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like (ball cannot enter). If the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is configured to flow down toward the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like, the timing at which the movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball may always be constant. There is. As a result, the result of the action of the movable accessory 722 is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable accessory 722. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down to the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like via the normal guide passage 604 without passing through the special gate 650. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special gate 650 and the game ball on which the movable accessory 722 acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 that can guide the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 to the winning / failing lottery area 407, or the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate). It is provided with a route distribution member 603 that distributes to the special guide passage 605 that can guide to 650).

Then, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the preceding first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, and the subsequent second game is played. The ball is guided to the special guide passage 605. As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the game balls can be directed to both the normal guide passage 604 and the special guide passage 605, respectively. Therefore, the movable accessory 722. The action and effect of will be more effective.

However, in the present embodiment, under the configuration in which the game ball is launched by the launching device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds at the time of "short small hit". At the time of "long small hit", the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. This is advantageous for the player in which a plurality of game balls are continuously entered into the central winning unit 37 during one open state in which the central winning unit 37 (blade member 404) is opened. The configuration is such that situations are unlikely to occur frequently.

Under such a configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the central winning unit 37 at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722. ), If the configuration is such that the game balls do not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is played at the stage when a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will diminish and their interests will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44 (the time from the start of operation of the movable accessory 722). ) Is set to "1 second", and "4 seconds" is set as the operating time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation.

As a result, for example, another game ball does not enter the central winning unit 37 together with the game ball that has entered the special gate 650, or the game ball that has entered the special gate 650 enters the central winning unit 37. Even if the game ball of No. 1 does not win the V prize, the game ball that subsequently enters the central winning unit 37 is given a chance to win the V prize with a higher probability.

That is, there is a higher probability for a game ball other than the game ball that entered the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball that passed through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404). It is structured so that you will be given a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (blade member 404), two game balls enter the internal region 401, and the preceding first game ball (first specified). The game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b as an area) flows down into the normal guide passage 604, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b next) flows down into the special guide passage 605. After that, when the game ball that has flowed down to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 passes through the movable accessory 722, Even if the movable accessory 722 has not yet operated and the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 does not receive the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722 and does not win a V prize, then the central winning unit 37 (blade member) During the next open state period of 404), the game ball that entered the internal region 401 (the game ball that passed through the entrance portion 601 next time) flows down to the normal guide passage 604, and due to the action of the movable accessory 722. You will be given a chance to win a V prize.

Of course, instead of the above configuration, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating), the operating time of the movable accessory 722 after the operation starts, etc. , Various set times are set to different times from the above set times, and a game in which a predetermined game ball enters the internal area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, after 1 minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. The ball may flow down to the normal guide passage 604, and the action of the movable accessory 722 may give a chance to win a V prize.

With such a configuration, the player actively tries to enter the game ball into the central winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The content is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to the above-described embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above-described embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiment.

(A) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a type in which a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes occurs when a jackpot is won in a winning / losing lottery based on a ball entering the starting winning section 33. It is equipped with the functions of the game machine (so-called old type 1 pachinko machine) and the central winning unit 37 that opens when a small hit is won in a winning or losing lottery based on the entry to the starting winning section 33. It also has the function of a type of gaming machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a game ball that has entered the unit 37 enters the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like and a big hit state (V winning big hit) is generated. This is a so-called 1-kind 2-kind mixer.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine. In addition to pachinko machines, it can also be used as various game machines such as arrange ball machines and sparrow balls.

For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33, the lottery process may be performed without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the entry into the starting winning section 33. , The central winning unit 37 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37 enters the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like to generate a big hit state (so-called old type 2 pachinko). It may be carried out as a machine).

Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, a jackpot state in which the central winning unit 37 as the variable winning means opens and closes may be generated. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. That is, a type of game in which a jackpot state occurs in which a predetermined variable ball-entry means (a large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a winning / losing lottery based on the entry into a predetermined starting ball-entry means. In the machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above embodiment, the game ball that has entered the ball opening 403 on the left side always passes through the entrance portion 601b on the left side that constitutes a specific area, and enters the ball opening 403 on the right side. The game ball that has entered the ball always passes through the right entrance portion 601b that constitutes the specific area, and the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 is detected by either the left or right side that constitutes the predetermined detection means. It is always detected by the switch 437. However, various configurations related to the specific region and the predetermined detection means, such as the position and number of the specific region and the predetermined detection means, are not limited to the configurations related to the inlet portion 601b and the internal ball entry detection switch 437. Other configurations may be adopted. For example, one exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 is set as a specific area, and an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means is arranged therein. The configuration may be provided at a position different from that of the portion 601b.

Further, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 and the like (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601 and the pair of left and right inlet portions 601b) may be omitted. good. For example, the left ball entry opening 403 and the like (including the left blade member 404, the left side portion of the introduction passage 601 and the left entrance portion 601b) are omitted, and the right ball entry opening 403 and the like (the right blade). The configuration may include only the member 404, the right side portion of the introduction passage 601 and the entrance portion 601b on the right side thereof). As a result, there is a ball passage (the right side portion of the introduction passage 601) that allows the game balls to pass one by one and guides the game balls one by one to the exit portion 601a as a specific area provided only in one place. It will be a configuration provided only for. That is, the game ball that does not pass through the one ball passage passes through the exit portion 601a and cannot enter the internal region 401. Further, the ball passage (the right side portion of the introduction passage 601) is provided at a position where only a game ball that is launched with a predetermined strength (right-handed) and jumps over the central winning unit 37 can pass through.

In place of or in addition to this, at the outer position (position outside the blade member 404) on one side (for example, the right side) of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, the ball entry opening 403 and the like on one side (one side). A ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) capable of guiding a game ball one by one to a blade member 404 on the side, one side portion of the introduction passage 601 and an inlet portion 601b on the one side thereof is provided. It may be configured as a new type.

Further, in a specific region such as the exit portion 601a or the entrance portion 601b of the introduction passage 601, the game ball is allowed to pass in the predetermined direction (internal region 401 side), while the game ball is in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. It may be configured to include a regulating means for restricting the passage of the ball (such as a valve-shaped member whose state changes from the first state to the second state by the force received from the game ball).

The winning probabilities related to various lottery related to the pachinko machine 10 (software lottery processing, lottery by mechanical mechanism, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. .. Needless to say, the board surface configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Further, it may be implemented as a so-called enclosed pachinko machine, which is a type of game machine that is not directly paid out to the player by circulating the game ball in the game machine.

(B) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the types of jackpot states are "3 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 3 times, "7 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated 7 times, and the special prize state (round). ) Is repeated 15 times as "15 round jackpot", but the present invention is not limited to this, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may occur.

Of course, instead of a gaming machine capable of generating a plurality of types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, 15 round jackpots) is generated.

(C) The configuration of the game mode (granting period, configuration content, etc.) granted after the end of the jackpot state is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a time reduction mode is provided in which the time (variation time) of the fluctuation display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the fluctuation display is performed four times on the special display device 43 after the end of the jackpot state. Although it is configured, the period for granting the time reduction mode is not limited to this. For example, the time reduction mode may be continued from the end of the jackpot state until the next jackpot state occurs.

Further, as the game mode after the end of the jackpot state, a high probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) is high may be provided instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode. Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine having a configuration in which a time reduction mode, a high probability mode, or the like is not given after the jackpot state ends.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning probability of the entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the special gate switch 651. The probabilities are configured to be the same in all modes.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode or the high probability mode, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, and the small hit ( In particular, a mode in which the winning probability of (long small hit) is higher than that of the normal mode may be performed.

(D) The configuration related to the accessory operation lottery (accessory operation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(D-1) For example, in the above embodiment, whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 when the game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the accessory operation lottery area 409. An operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not, and when the operation assist lottery is won, the operation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate.

Not limited to this, for example, when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 without performing the lottery process, the operating condition may be always satisfied and the movable accessory 722 may be operated.

Further, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651 is provided, and when the counting value exceeds a predetermined number, the operating condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is operated. good. Alternatively, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651 is provided, and when the counting value becomes a predetermined number or more, a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. In this case, the operating condition may be satisfied and the movable accessory 722 may be operated.

(D-2) Further, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not a soft lottery process, but a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a crune is provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. A lottery may be performed based on the behavior of the game ball. However, it is preferable to perform the lottery process in software in order to simplify the configuration of the central winning unit 37.

For example, in the accessory operation lottery area 409, the game ball does not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game ball can pass through (or does not pass through) the special gate 650 at a predetermined ratio. May be.

(D-3) Further, in the above embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the operation trigger of the movable accessory 722 is provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. However, the position where the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this, and may be a different position.

For example, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a second internal region different from the internal region 401 (a region in which a ball can be entered from an entrance portion different from the entry ball opening 403 opened and closed by the blade member 404), and the second internal region is provided. A configuration may be configured in which an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the internal area.

(D-4) Further, like the through gate 34, a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered (passed) by providing an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) in the game area outside the central winning unit 37. It may be configured. It should be noted that the configuration related to the trigger entry means is not limited to the entry means such as a through gate through which the entered game ball can pass, and the entry of the winning opening or the like in which the entered game ball is discharged to the outside of the game area. It may be a ball means. Then, based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined through gate, the predetermined winning opening, etc., the predetermined lottery process is executed and the predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. When it is established, the movable accessory 722 may be activated.

Further, after entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and guiding the game ball to the special guide passage 605, the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651, and then on the back side of the game board 30. It may be configured to return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37 instead of being discharged to.

Further, the game ball that has entered the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by the predetermined ball detecting means. It is configured to return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and then to enter the trigger ball means (special gate, etc.) provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37. It may be configured so that it can be detected by a detection means (special gate switch or the like).

However, if the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the operation trigger of the movable accessory 722 is arranged outside the central winning unit 37, the trigger ball entry detection means (special gate switch) using a wire rod or the like. Since there is a risk that a fraudulent act of erroneously detecting the switch and operating the movable accessory 722 may be performed, from this point of view, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is arranged in the central winning unit 37. Is more preferable.

(D-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, the variable display is started on the special gate display device 44, and after a predetermined time, the stop display is stopped in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. Is performed, and if the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is the winning result, the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate thereafter.

Not limited to this, the display means (special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery may be omitted.

Further, in the above embodiment, the variation time of the variation display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but the variation time is not limited to this, and a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times are provided. It may be configured.

For example, in the main control device 261, it is stored in the fluctuation pattern storage means based on the fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation display times and the game ball being detected by the special gate switch 651. As a configuration in which a variation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of variation patterns is provided, and the special gate display device 44 is controlled based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means. May be good.

As a result, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the special gate display device 44 can be made variable. As a result, the operation start period from the detection of the game ball by the special gate switch 651 to the actual operation state (advantageous state) of the movable accessory 722 can be made variable.

(D-6) In the above embodiment, the game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or the operation of the movable accessory 722. Even so, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) for that amount is not reserved. That is, the operation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when the game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or the operation of the movable accessory 722, the predetermined number of times. A configuration may be provided in which a holding means capable of holding a variable display of minutes (operation assist lottery result) can be provided.

(E) The configuration related to route distribution (route distribution area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(E-1) For example, the route distribution member 603 of the above embodiment is pivotally supported so as to be swingable, and is normally maintained in a right inclined state by an urging means such as a coil spring (not shown) to provide a drop passage 602. The falling game ball is in a state where it can flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. Then, in such a state, when the game ball falling in the fall passage 602 is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, the route distribution member 603 is subjected to the force received from the game ball in contact with the left piece portion 614. , The game ball that rotates counterclockwise against the urging force of the urging means, tilts to the left for a predetermined time, and falls down the falling passage 602 can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. It is configured to be in a state.

The configuration of the route distribution means (shape, operation mode, etc.) is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, the shaft pin 610 is fixed to the shaft portion 611 of the route distribution member 603, and the shaft portion 611 projects toward the back surface side of the upper rear wall portion 400a, and as shown in FIG. 46, the protruding shaft pin 610 A working piece 800 extending downward from the rear end is provided, and a pair of coil springs 801, 802 as maintenance means for supporting the working piece 800 from the left and right are provided, and the route distribution member 603 is normally provided. The central piece portion 613 may be maintained in an equilibrium state (reference posture) without tilting to the left or right at the center position in the left-right direction (position of the shaft pin 610).

With this configuration, when a game ball falls on the route distribution member 603 that is normally in equilibrium, the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side or the special guide passage on the right side. It is in a state where it is unknown whether it will be led to 605.

Then, when the game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in the equilibrium state is guided to, for example, the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the route distribution member 603 is released from the game ball that contacts the right piece portion 615. The elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 is once rotated in the clockwise direction by the received force to enter the right tilted state [see FIG. 41 (a)], which is the first state (first posture). As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and becomes the second state (second posture), which is the left tilted state [see FIG. 41 (b)]. After that, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, and then returns to an equilibrium state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802.

Similarly, when the game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in the equilibrium state is guided to, for example, the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, the route distribution member 603 comes into contact with the left piece portion 614. The force received from the springs causes the springs to rotate counterclockwise and then tilt to the left, and then the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 causes the springs to rotate clockwise to tilt to the right. After that, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times so as to be in an inclined state to the left again, and then returns to an equilibrium state by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801, 802.

Under such a configuration, when two game balls continuously fall on the route distribution member 603 in the equilibrium state, for example, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. The second subsequent game ball will be guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. On the contrary, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the subsequent second game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of continuously falling game balls are alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. The configuration can be realized. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and compacted.

(E-2) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, a weight is attached to the lower end of the working piece 800 instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, and the route distribution member 603 is normally attached. The route distribution member 603 may be configured to be freely swingable by the action of the game ball while maintaining the equilibrium state.

(E-3) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801, 802, a drive means (distribution drive means) such as a motor for swinging the route distribution member 603 is provided. The route distribution member 603 may be configured to swing periodically or continuously between the right-tilted state and the left-tilted state. Further, in the normal state, the route allocating means such as the route allocating member 603 may be in the stopped state, and the predetermined operating state may be obtained only when the predetermined driving condition is satisfied and the specific state is reached.

(E-4) The route distribution means does not have to operate, and may be fixed to, for example, a housing 400 or the like, or integrally provided. That is, the route may be distributed according to the random behavior of the game ball. In addition, various other configurations related to the route distribution means, such as the position and number of route distribution means, are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, one or a plurality of route distribution means may be provided at a position different from that of the above embodiment (another variable ball entry means different from the central winning unit 37).

(F) The configuration of various guide routes is not limited to the above embodiment.

(F-1) For example, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, the game ball is guided from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603. The game ball is a petal gate from the time when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 rather than the arrival time of the movable body until reaching the movable accessory 722 (normal guide passage 604 exit portion 604a). It is preferable that the structure reaches 650 (special gate switch 651) and the time required to reach the advantageous state until the movable accessory 722 becomes the advantageous state is shortened.

The route is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable accessory 722 (exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604) from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603. From the time when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is configured to reach the advantageous state for a long time. If so, two game balls are continuously entered into the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the first game ball in front is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent game balls are distributed to the normal guide passage 604. When the second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605, the player knows that the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 operates. , There is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced.

In order to lengthen the time it takes for the game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, increasing the moving distance of the game ball required for passing through the normal guide passage 604 is an example. Conceivable. Alternatively, or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the normal guide passage 604.

Here, as a means of delay, for example, a configuration in which the game ball reciprocates several times in the same place such as a stage or a crune, or a configuration in which the ball moves forward after making a lap, or a rib or the like is used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball moves forward.

(F-2) For example, in the above embodiment, the game ball is used as a special gate as a second route (triggered ball guidance route) for guiding the game ball distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the triggering ball means (special gate). The special guide passage 605 for guiding to the 650 is provided for only one route, but the time required for the game ball to reach the route distribution member 603 to the triggering ball means (special gate) is not limited to this. A configuration may be provided in which a plurality of different second routes (triggered ball guidance routes) are provided.

By providing a plurality of second routes (triggered ball guide routes), the movable accessory 722 is actually in the operating state (advantageous state) from the time when the game ball is sorted by the route sorting member 603 (predetermined trigger). The period until it becomes can be changed.

Further, according to the above configuration, the period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the triggering ball means (special gate) is made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region 401 of the central winning unit 37, and the interest can be further improved.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604). From the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 rather than the arrival time of the movable body reaching 604a), the game ball reaches the first trigger entry means (first special gate 650A) and is a movable accessory. Advantageous state until 722 is put into operation Advantageous state to reach the first second route (first special guide passage 605A) and the second trigger entry means (second special gate 650B), which have a long arrival time. It may be configured to include a second second route (second special guide passage 605B) having a short arrival time. Here, the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" constitutes the "first flow route", and the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" constitutes the "first flow route". It constitutes a "second flow route" (the same applies hereinafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the first special gate 650A is provided with the first special gate switch 651A for detecting the game ball passing therethrough, and the second special gate 650B provides the game ball passing therewith. A second special gate switch 651B for detecting is provided. Here, the "first special gate switch 651A" constitutes the "first trigger entry ball detection means", and the "second special gate switch 651B" constitutes the "second trigger entry ball detection means" ( The same applies below).

The passage widths of the special guide passages 605A and 605B and the special gates 650A and 650B are set so that the game balls can pass through one by one. Further, the game balls that have passed through the special gates 650A and 650B are discharged to the outside of the internal region 401 through a discharge passage (not shown).

Further, a slide member 655 that can open and close the entrance portion is provided at the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and by being displaced to a position protruding forward, the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B is closed and retracted to a position retracted rearward. Due to the displacement, the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B is opened and opened.

When the slide member 655 is in the closed state, the game ball distributed by the route distribution member 603 as the upstream route distribution means passes through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and passes through the first special guide passage. You will be guided to 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in the open state, the game ball distributed by the route distribution member 603 is guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

Here, the slide member 655 may be configured to constantly repeat the slide displacement operation, or the state of the slide member 655 may be changed periodically or randomly. Further, in a specific state, the ratio of the slide member 655 in the open state and the ratio of the slide member 655 in the closed state may be controlled to be different.

That is, the slide member 655 constitutes the trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) in the present embodiment, and the destination of the game ball is set to "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or ". It is possible to change to the second second route (second special guide passage 605B). The route distribution means such as the route distribution member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655.

Then, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an operation assist lottery for deciding whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is performed. Here, if the operation assist lottery is won, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. In a specific state, the winning probability in the operation assist lottery differs depending on whether the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A or the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. May be. That is, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)". The ratio of the movable accessory 722 that can be in a predetermined operating state may be different from that of the case where the movable accessory 722 is used.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 47, in the first special guide passage 605A, by projecting the ribs 653A and 653B, the passage length of the first special guide passage 605A, which is the movement path of the game ball, is lengthened. , The structure is such that the game ball moves forward over time while stopping the momentum of the game ball.

In addition to or in place of the ribs 653A and 653B, other delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage or a crune, etc., the game ball reciprocates or laps the same place several times before proceeding. Such a mechanism) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A and 650B (special gate switches 651A and 651B) are individually provided corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B, respectively. However, instead of this, the game ball passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B moves toward one special gate (special gate switch), and the same special The configuration may be such that it is detected by a gate switch.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 47, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball always flows down to the first special gate 650A (first special guide passage 605A). When the game ball passes through the special gate switch 651A) and flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball always flows down to the second special gate 650B (first). It is configured to pass through the special gate switch 651B) of 2, but not limited to this, the game ball passes through the first special gate 650A and the second special gate 650B as the triggering ball means at a predetermined ratio. It may be a possible (or non-passing) configuration. In addition, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball goes down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)". The ratio of the game ball that can pass through the triggering ball means (the ratio of the movable accessory 722 that can be in a predetermined operating state) may be different from that of the case where the ball has flowed down.

(F-3) The configuration including the plurality of second routes (triggered ball guidance routes) as described in the above (f-2) is the route exemplified in the above (e-1) to (e-3). It will be more successful under the configuration related to the distribution member 603.

Temporarily, from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is sent to the special guide passage by the route distribution member 603 rather than the time required for the game ball to reach the movable accessory 722. If the game ball reaches the special gate 650 from the time when it is guided to 605 and the time to reach the advantageous state is long until the movable accessory 722 becomes the advantageous state, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is a special guide passage. When the game is distributed to 605, the player knows that the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 operates, so that the interest may be significantly reduced.

On the contrary, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604. As the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot state increases, the player will pay close attention to the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, the route distribution member 603 guides the game ball specially rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable accessory 722 from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603. If the game ball reaches the special gate 650 from the time when it is guided to the passage 605 and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable accessory 722 becomes the advantageous state is shortened, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the above in succession, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is normally guided. When distributed to the passage 604, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in the advantageous state for a relatively long period of time. There is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced because it will be known to be done.

On the contrary, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605. As the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot state increases, the player will pay close attention to the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with a sense of expectation.

Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a plurality of second routes (triggered ball guide routes) as described above, two game balls continuously enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, and the preceding one Regardless of whether the second game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 or the special guide passage 605, the subsequent second game ball is "the first second route (first route) having a long time to reach the advantageous state". Depending on whether it is assigned to the "special guide passage 605A)" or the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B) with a short time to reach the advantageous state", the timing at which the movable accessory 722 operates and the game ball Since there is a possibility that the timing of reaching the movable accessory 722 will be matched, the player can pay close attention to the behavior of the game ball with a sense of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot state.

(G) The configuration related to the winning / failing lottery (winning / failing lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(G-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as a hit / fail sorting means. The rotating body 414 includes one special pocket portion 416a for jackpot and two non-special pocket portions 416b for disengagement, and rotates at a constant speed in the counterclockwise direction.

Not limited to this, for example, the number and ratio of the pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 may be changed so that the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is different.

(G-2) Further, the rotating body 414 is provided with, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for 3R jackpot and a special pocket portion 416a for 7R jackpot, and the jackpot type lottery is also performed in the winning / failing lottery area 407. May be. In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(G-3) Instead of the rotating body 414, another winning / failing lottery mechanism such as a crune may be provided.

(H) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(H-1) In the type lottery area 408, the type distribution means (type determination means) for allocating the destination of the game ball to either the 15R entry port 731, the 7R entry port 732, or the 3R entry port 733. ) Is provided as a type distribution mechanism unit 741.

Instead of the type sorting mechanism unit 741, another type lottery mechanism such as a crune may be provided.

(H-2) The type lottery area 408 may be omitted, and the type of the jackpot state to be given when the game ball enters the special ball entry means such as the first V winning passage 427 may be determined. That is, the type determination for determining the type of the jackpot state may be performed by a soft determination process.

(I) The configuration of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the route distribution area 406 (route distribution member 603) and the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) may be omitted. In such a case, for example, when the ball entry is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, the operation assist lottery for whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 may be performed.

However, if the movable accessory 722 is only configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the ball entry detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a game of entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. The movable accessory 722 operates with respect to the ball at the same timing each time.

Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to adopt various configurations in which the operation timing is variable, such as the configuration in which the fluctuation time is variable as described above.

(J) The configuration (position, shape, operating mode, advantageous state, etc.) of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is limited to the configuration related to the movable accessory 722 of the above embodiment. Other configurations such as an opening / closing member may be adopted instead of the one.

(J-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above embodiment is in an operating state (advantageous state), so that the winning / failing lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741 are avoided. , The game ball that is normally guided to the guide passage 604 is configured to be able to directly guide the game ball to the 15R entry port 731.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (advantageous state), it is easier to win the V prize than when the movable accessory 722 is in the non-operating state (non-advantageous state). At the same time, the game ball is configured to be easy to enter into the 15R entrance 731 corresponding to the 15R jackpot, which is the most advantageous for the player among the multiple types of special gaming states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot). ing.

Not limited to this, the game ball may be guided to the entrance of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding only the winning / losing lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and granting only the right to generate a big hit state. ..

(J-2) Further, when the movable body is provided in the type lottery area 408 and the state of the movable body changes to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741 is avoided, and the game ball is inserted into the 15R entry port. It may be configured to guide to 731.

(J-3) The rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) may be used as the movable body in the present embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414 rotating at a constant speed at normal times changes to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for jackpot corresponds to the gate portion 435. The special pocket portion 416a for jackpot may be temporarily stopped at, or may be configured to move at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very low speed.

(J-4) The rotating body 414 includes, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for a 3R jackpot, a special pocket portion 416a for a 7R jackpot, and a special pocket portion 416a for a 15R jackpot. In the (non-advantageous state), the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot is controlled to move at a very high speed at the position corresponding to the gate portion 435, and the game ball is relative to the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot. When it becomes difficult for the ball to enter and the game ball becomes advantageous based on passing through the special gate 650, the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot is once at the position corresponding to the gate portion 435. It may be configured to stop or control the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot to move at a normal speed at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435.

(J-5) The type sorting mechanism unit 741 (first transfer plate 744, second transfer plate 745) may be used as the movable body in the present embodiment.

For example, the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer plate 745, which are normally swinging, change to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the postponed position, or The configuration may be such that the game ball can easily enter the 15R entry port 731 due to a longer time in the postponed position.

(J-6) Further, the operating state (advantageous state) of the movable body (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism portion 741 and the like) may be set in a plurality of ways. Further, it may be configured to be determined by the lottery result of a predetermined operation lottery process. When the movable body is put into the operating state (advantageous state) in this way, the operating pattern determining means in the present embodiment is configured by the function of determining which of the plurality of operating patterns is to be executed.

Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. It may be configured so that it becomes easier to enter the special ball-entry means (V-winning passage 427, 730, etc.) and it becomes easier to win the V-winning jackpot. Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A configuration may be made in which a predetermined type of special gaming state (for example, the most advantageous 15R jackpot for the player) is likely to occur among a plurality of types of special gaming states (for example, 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot).

(K) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, when a winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery, the effect display device 42 or the like is produced during the operation start period before the movable accessory 722 is operated. In the means, the opening effect as a preceding effect suggesting that the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state may be executed.

In addition, when the variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and the stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery, the opening effect is performed after the stop display. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (the configuration in which the variable display is not performed), the operation assist lottery is performed after the winning result is obtained.

(K-1) In addition to the above configuration, in the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262, an effect pattern storage means for storing a plurality of effect patterns that determine the effect time of the opening effect, and establishment of operating conditions (for example, operation assist). Based on the winning result obtained by lottery), the effect pattern selection means capable of selecting any one from a plurality of effect patterns stored in the effect pattern storage means, and the effect pattern selection means. The configuration may include an effect control means capable of controlling a predetermined effect means based on the effect pattern.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the operation start period (for example, the opening period) variable from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes an advantageous state.

(K-2) The operation start period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) to the actual favorable state of the movable accessory 722 may be variable without performing the above-mentioned opening effect or the like. ..

For example, in the main control device 261, an operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that determine an operation start period from the time when the operation condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 722 is in the operation state, and a special gate switch 651 allow the game ball to be stored. Based on the detection, the operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means and the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means. Based on this, the movable accessory 722 may be configured to include a control means capable of controlling the movable accessory 722.

(L) Not only a game effect using a movable body such as a movable accessory 722, but also another game effect may be performed.

(L-1) For example, the discharge route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entry detection switch 462) and the special guidance passage 605 (special gate switch 651) without being guided to the first V winning passage 427 or the like. ), When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of the game ball discharged to the outside of the internal area 401, a specific process advantageous to the player may be executed. The specific process execution means in the present embodiment is configured by the function of the main control device 261 or the like that executes such a process.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game ball guided toward the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like, but also the game ball discharged via the discharge route (second route) is used to impart new game playability. It is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

(L-2) A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by a ball detecting means (discharging ball detecting means) such as a non-special ball entry detection switch 462 or a special gate switch 651 is provided, and the counting value is predetermined. When the number is equal to or more than the number, the predetermined condition is satisfied, or when the count value is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the predetermined lottery process is executed and the predetermined lottery result is obtained. , The configuration may be such that a specific process advantageous to the player is executed.

As the specific processing, for example, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state, the processing for prolonging the operating state, the processing for increasing the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, and the special pocket portion of the rotating body 414. Examples include processing that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the 416a, and processing that makes it easier for the game ball to be guided to the 15R entry port 731 in the type lottery area 408.

(M) The small hit opening mode (opening / closing pattern) of the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 and the big hit opening mode (opening / closing pattern) of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 are limited to the above embodiments. It's not a thing.

(M-1) For example, in the above embodiment, as the opening / closing pattern of the blade member 404, two opening / closing patterns of "short small hit" and "long small hit" are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may include one or three or more opening / closing patterns.

(M-2) In the above embodiment, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds at the time of "short small hit", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds at the time of "long small hit". However, the one-time opening mode (opening time) of the blade member 404 is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be configured to include other opening modes having different opening times.

(M-3) In the above embodiment, the blade member is subjected to one small hit (result of one winning / failing lottery performed based on the ball entry detection by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b). The opening / closing operation (opening operation) of the 404 is performed only once (one round), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice or more (multiple) for each small hit. It may be configured to be performed (round).

(M-4) For example, a first opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed once (1 round) and a second opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice (2 rounds). A configuration in which a plurality of open / close patterns having different open / close operations (number of rounds) can be executed may be used as in the provided configuration. However, if a predetermined opening / closing pattern (for example, a long small hit that opens for 1.5 seconds) is performed among a plurality of opening / closing patterns, if the predetermined opening / closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short that opens for 0.5 seconds). It is preferable that the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than when a small hit is performed).

[Additional Notes]
Hereinafter, the technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described together with their effects.

Conventional problem A. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, the movable body is periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation regardless of the game, or the movable body is opened every time the variable ball entry means is opened. The effect related to the movable body became monotonous, and the player's interest in the movement of the movable body (a feeling of excitement) tended to diminish. In this respect, further improvement of interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest.

Means A1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a state can be changed to at least an advantageous state (special state) which is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) which is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. Movable bodies that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball),
An opportunity ball entry means provided so that a game ball can enter (or pass), and
An opportunity ball detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means,
A lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection of the trigger entry ball detection means, and
It is provided with a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by at least the operation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the means A1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, whether or not the movable body is put into a predetermined advantageous state is determined by lottery. As a result, for example, the movable body does not constantly or continuously operate, and the variable ball entry means does not open, and the predetermined operation does not occur every time according to a predetermined opportunity. , It is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect related to the movable body and raise the expectation of the player for the movement of the movable body.

In particular, the present means is configured to softly determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state by the lottery processing executing means (operation lottery processing). As a result, it is not necessary to newly provide a complicated mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism for drawing lots based on the behavior of the game ball, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, as the arrangement position of the "triggered ball entering means", for example, "in the internal area of the variable ball entering means", "in the area of the variable ball entering means different from the internal area", "the above". "Inside the game area outside the variable ball entry means" and the like.

Means A2. The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein the trigger ball entering means is configured so that a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area can enter the ball.

According to the above means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal region can be obtained. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, which is a further interest. Can be improved.

If the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball detection means using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts that cause the means to erroneously detect and operate the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the means A2, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entering means in the internal region of the variable ball entering means.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, wherein the gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the trigger entry means is configured so as not to flow down (impossible to enter) into the special entry means.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means A4. A first route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger entry means.
A second route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger entry means and cannot flow down to the special entry means.
A route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body can cause a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down to the first route.

Under the configuration related to each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no space between them). Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a continuous ball state, the same shall apply hereinafter.) Even if the ball is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as no game ball entering the special ball entry means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means A4, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first preceding game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down to one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route. Therefore, the action and effect of providing the movable body will be more effective.

In addition, "the first flow-down route (first, the first route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area are the first. In the case of a configuration including a second flow-down route (second said first route) capable of flowing down to the special entry means with a higher probability than the flow-down route (first said first route), the whole As a result, the proportion of game balls that flow down to the special entry means increases, so in such a case, the probability of occurrence of a special game state is inevitably low in consideration of the balance of profits between the player and the game hall. It must be set, which may reduce the interest of the player.

Means A5. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the next game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means A5, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to one of the first route or the second route, the subsequent second game ball (the next game ball that has passed through a specific area) flows down to the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the ball entry means and the movable body operates, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body has not yet operated and the first route. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to the special ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that has subsequently entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (passes the specific area next to the next). It is also possible to configure the game ball) to flow down to the first route and to be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means A5 is opened / closed during the open state period following the open state period of the opening / closing member through which the game ball has passed when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the member. "

The configuration according to the means A5 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration related to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means A6. A display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the trigger ball detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process.
The movable body control means
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, wherein the display means is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made.

If the movable body suddenly operates without any warning, the player who has not been watching the movable body until then may be confused because he / she cannot grasp the situation.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body may be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the game production using the movable body and further improve the interest for the player.

Means A7. A variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times, and a variation pattern storage means.
A variation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the trigger ball detection means.
The gaming machine according to means A6, comprising: a display control means for controlling the display means based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means.

According to the means A7, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display in the display means can be made variable. As a result, it is possible to make the operation start period variable from the detection of the game ball by the trigger ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes an advantageous state.

As a result, the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game effect using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means A8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state is increased. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means A9. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means A1 to A8, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among the plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of the special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means A10. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional task B. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, the movable body regularly or continuously performs a predetermined motion regardless of the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the effect related to the movable body is produced. It became monotonous, and players' interest in movable bodies tended to diminish. In this respect, further improvement of interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest.

Means B1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a state can be changed to at least an advantageous state (special state) which is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) which is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. Movable bodies that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball),
An opportunity ball entering means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through), and
A movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the means B1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a trigger ball entry means (trigger ball detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, it is based on the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. Therefore, since it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

If the trigger ball entry means (trigger ball detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball detection means using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts that cause the means to erroneously detect and operate the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to this means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entering means in the internal region of the variable ball entering means.

Means B2. A predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area is provided.
The gaming machine according to means B1, wherein the trigger ball entering means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detecting means so that a gaming ball detected by the predetermined detecting means can enter the ball. ..

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the detection of the predetermined detection means, the movable body operates at the same timing each time with respect to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means (internal area). Will be done.

Therefore, the effect related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body, and there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing may be performed.

On the other hand, according to the means B2, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the effect related to the movable body and to suppress the cheating as described above.

Means B3. A trigger ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entering means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be satisfied when a gaming ball is detected by the triggering ball detecting means.

According to the means B3, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state by a soft lottery process, so that the control process can be simplified.

Means B4. An opportunity ball detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means,
A lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection of the trigger entry ball detection means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operating conditions are satisfied when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by at least the operating lottery process.

According to the means B4, the lottery processing execution means (operation lottery processing) is used to softly determine whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, it is not necessary to perform the movement each time in accordance with a predetermined momentum, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the effect related to the movable body and increase the expectation of the player for the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means B5. The game according to any one of means B1 to B4, wherein the gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the trigger entry means is configured to be unable to flow down (cannot enter) into the special entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means B6. A first route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger entry means.
A second route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger entry means and cannot flow down to the special entry means.
A route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body can cause a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down to the first route.

Under the configuration related to each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no space between them). Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a continuous ball state, the same shall apply hereinafter.) Even if the ball is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as no game ball entering the special ball entry means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means B6, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first preceding game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down to one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route. Therefore, the action and effect of providing the movable body will be more effective.

Means B7. The gaming machine according to means B6, wherein the gaming ball includes a plurality of the second routes configured so that the time required from the route distribution means to the triggering ball means is different.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing each time from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means, the effect related to the movable body becomes monotonous and can be moved by the player. It becomes easier to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the means B7, the operation start period from the time when the game ball is sorted by the route sorting means until the movable body becomes a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game effect using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

It should be noted that "the time required for the game ball to reach the triggering ball means from the route sorting means is different" means, for example, "the distance from the route sorting means to the triggering ball means is different". included.

Further, a configuration may be configured in which triggering ball means (triggered ball detecting means) are individually provided corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". May move toward one trigger ball detection means (trigger ball detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball detection means.

For example, "the first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to the first triggering ball means, and the second said second route that allows the game ball to flow down to the second triggering ball means. It may be a "provided" configuration.

Further, a trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first first route" or the "second second route" is provided. It may be configured as a new type. According to such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Means B8. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. From that point on, the first and second routes have a long time to reach the advantageous state until the game ball reaches the triggering ball means (triggered ball detecting means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to means B6, comprising the second route, which has a time to reach an advantageous state shorter than the time to reach a movable body.

From the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body, from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is long, two game balls enter the inner region of the variable ball entry means. Is continuously entered, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route. Since it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body before the timing when the movable body operates, there is a possibility that the interest will be significantly reduced.

On the contrary, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is shortened, two to the internal region of the variable ball entry means. Comparison when the game balls are continuously entered, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce the interest. ..

On the other hand, according to the means B8, two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is on either the first route or the second route. Even if they are sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first second route having a long time to reach the advantageous state" or "the second route having a short time to reach the advantageous state". Since there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body remain depending on whether or not the game ball is played, the player has a feeling of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state. You can watch the behavior.

Means B9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the next game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means B9, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means B9, two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to one of the first route or the second route, the subsequent second game ball (the next game ball that has passed through a specific area) flows down to the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the ball entry means and the movable body operates, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body has not yet operated and the first route. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to the special ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that has subsequently entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (passes the specific area next to the next). It is also possible to configure the game ball) to flow down to the first route and to be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means B9 is opened / closed during the open state period following the open state period of the opening / closing member through which the game ball has passed when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the member. "

The configuration according to the means B9 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration related to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means B10. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state is increased. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means B11. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means B1 to B10, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among the plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B10, the type of the special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means B12. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional task C. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, even when a situation advantageous to the player occurs, for example, a plurality of gaming balls continuously enter the variable ball entering means at the same time, these plurality of gaming machines are used. Depending on the ball entry timing, multiple gaming balls may all head toward the special entry means, or multiple game balls may not all head toward the special entry means, and may be guided to the discharge section or non-special entry means. The configuration was such that problems such as spilling were likely to occur.

Normally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, even if a game ball newly enters the special ball entry means in a state where the right to the special game state is obtained, the special game state for that amount is not given. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls enter the special ball entry means in succession, the special game state for two is not given, and only one special game state is generated. Therefore, the player may have negative emotions such as loss, waste, and waste.

As a result, there is a concern that a situation may occur in which the interest of the player is lowered even though a favorable situation for the player such as the special gaming state is given occurs.

On the contrary, when a plurality of game balls are all guided to the discharge part, etc., since a plurality of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, the game is played to the special ball entry means. It did not contribute to the player's expectation that it would work in favor of letting the ball in, and there was a risk that the interest would decline.

In this sense, further improvement of interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to dramatically improve the interest when a plurality of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means. It is to provide a game machine that can play.

Means C1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
An opportunity ball entering means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through), and
A first route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger entry means.
A second route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger entry means and cannot flow down to the special entry means.
In a specific state, a route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route, and
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a state can be changed to at least an advantageous state (special state) which is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) which is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. It is provided with a movable body (which can act on the game ball) that can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down to the first route.
A movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger entry means", for example, "the trigger entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the trigger entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detecting means", a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the triggering ball detecting means" or "the ball entering detection of the triggering ball detecting means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery" and the like are included.

According to the means C1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has entered the inner region of the variable ball entry means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down to either the first route or the second route. Since it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route, the above movable body is provided. The effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that the expectation of the occurrence of the special gaming state may be improved by inserting a plurality of game balls into the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Further, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball and the subsequent second game ball each flow down to which route. Since the results differ depending on the situation, the player will have a sense of expectation and will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means C2. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.) is
It is configured so that the state can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route.
A maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in the first state is provided.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means maintained in the first state, the route distribution means is configured to change to the second state by the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1 characterized by the above.

Under the configuration according to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to let the game ball enter the triggering ball means, and in order to let the game ball enter the triggering ball means, the route It is necessary to change the distribution means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

That is, in order to operate the movable body, at least two game balls are continuously entered into the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is moved by the route distribution means maintained in the first state. It is necessary to flow down to the first route, and the subsequent second game ball to flow down to the second route by the route distribution means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is necessary to ensure the playability that the player is more advantageous when a plurality of game balls are inserted than when one game ball is inserted into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. Can be done.

As a more specific configuration of the means C2, for example, "means C2. The route distribution means is
It is a route distribution member configured so that the posture can be changed into a first posture in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route.
A maintenance means (such as an urging means) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in the first posture is provided.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first posture, the route distribution member resists the urging force of the urging means (for example, by the force received from the game ball). The gaming machine according to means C1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to change to the second posture. "And so on.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. It is characterized in that the game ball reaches the trigger ball entering means (triggered ball detecting means) from the time when the game ball is played, and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to the means C2.

From the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body, from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body becomes the advantageous state is long, two game balls are continuously connected to the internal region of the variable ball entry means. When the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player is a movable body. Since it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body before the timing at which the game is activated, there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned trouble and suppress the deterioration of the interest for the player.

The "advantageous state arrival time" may be shorter than the "movable body arrival time". For example, the route allocating means directly enters the triggering ball means (up to the triggering ball means). The purpose is to include (such as a configuration in which the distance is zero).

Further, in order to lengthen the "movable body arrival time", for example, it is conceivable to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required for passing through the "first route".

Alternatively, or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed on the "first route". Here, as a means of delay, for example, a configuration in which the game ball reciprocates several times in the same place such as a stage or a crune, or a configuration in which the ball moves forward after making a lap, or a rib or the like is used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball moves forward.

In addition, "from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, the game ball reaches the trigger ball entering means (triggered ball detecting means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. After that, the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body, rather than the time to reach the advantageous end until the advantageous state ends. It is preferably configured so that the arrival time is short.

If the "movable body arrival time" is longer than the "advantageous end arrival time", two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the first game preceding the game. When the ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player can play the game ball after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends. There is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced because it will be known that the will reach the movable body.

Means C4. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.) is
At least, the state can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route.
The gaming machine according to means C1, further comprising a distribution driving means that periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the preceding first game ball is always distributed to either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent first game ball is always distributed to either the first route or the second route. When the second game ball is configured to be distributed to the other route, it is continuously entered according to the preset relationship between the "advantageous state arrival time" and the "movable body arrival time". When the two balled game balls are alternately distributed by the route distribution means, the subsequent result is determined, which may reduce the interest of the player.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is on the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which one is to be distributed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

As a result, the player can pay attention to the behavior of the game ball with a feeling of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means C5. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.) is
At least, the state can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route.
A maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in a reference state between the first state and the second state is provided.
In the state where the route distribution means is maintained in the reference state, the game ball can flow down to either the first route or the second route.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means maintained in the reference state, the route distribution means changes to the second state by the force received from the game ball.
When the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means maintained in the reference state, the route distribution means is configured to change to the first state by the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1 characterized by the above.

According to the means C5, the same action and effect as those of the means C4 are exhibited. In particular, according to this means, since it is not necessary to provide a drive means for driving the route distribution means, a plurality of (two) game balls that continuously flow down are alternately arranged while adopting a relatively simple configuration. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the flow flows down to different routes. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and compacted.

As a more specific configuration of the means C5, for example, "means C5. The route distribution means is
It is a route distribution member configured so that the posture can be changed to at least a first posture in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down to the second route.
A maintenance means (such as an urging means) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in a reference posture between the first posture and the second posture is provided.
In the state where the route distribution member is maintained in the reference posture, the game ball can flow down to either the first route or the second route.
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the reference posture, the route distribution member changes to the second posture by the force received from the game ball.
When the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution member maintained in the reference posture, the route distribution member is configured to change to the first posture by the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1 characterized by the above. "And so on.

Means C6. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. From that point on, the first second route and the movable route have a long time to reach the advantageous state until the game ball reaches the trigger ball entering means (triggered ball detecting means) and the movable body becomes an advantageous state. The gaming machine according to means C4 or C5, characterized in that the second route and the second route, in which the time to reach the advantageous state is shorter than the time to reach the body, are provided.

From the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body, from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body becomes the advantageous state is long, two game balls are continuously connected to the internal region of the variable ball entry means. When the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player is a movable body. Since it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body before the timing at which the game is activated, there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced.

On the contrary, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body becomes the advantageous state is shortened, two game balls are entered into the internal region of the variable ball entry means. Is continuously entered, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the first route, which is relatively long. Unless the movable body is maintained in the advantageous state for a period of time, it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce the interest.

On the other hand, according to the means C6, two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is on either the first route or the second route. Even if they are sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first second route having a long time to reach the advantageous state" or "the second route having a short time to reach the advantageous state". Since there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body remain depending on whether or not the game ball is played, the player has a feeling of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state. You can watch the behavior.

It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which triggering ball means (triggered ball detecting means) are individually provided corresponding to each of the "first route 2" and the "second route 2". A game ball passing through the "first second route" or the "second second route" moves toward one trigger ball entry means (trigger ball detection means), and the same trigger ball detection means. It may be configured to be detected by means.

For example, "the first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to the first triggering ball means, and the second said second route that allows the game ball to flow down to the second triggering ball means. It may be a "provided" configuration.

Further, a trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first first route" or the "second second route" is provided. It may be configured as a new type. According to such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Means C7. The game according to any one of means C1 to C6, wherein the gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the trigger entry means is configured to be unable to flow down (cannot enter) into the special entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means C7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means C8. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the next game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means C8, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means C8, two game balls enter the internal region during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to one of the first route or the second route, the subsequent second game ball (the next game ball that has passed through a specific area) flows down to the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the ball entry means and the movable body operates, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body has not yet operated and the first route. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to the special ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that has subsequently entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (passes the specific area next to the next). It is also possible to configure the game ball) to flow down to the first route and to be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means C8 is opened / closed during the open state period following the open state period of the opening / closing member through which the game ball has passed when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the member. "

The configuration according to the means C8 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration related to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means C9, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means C10. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means C1 to C9, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among the plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of the special gaming state is determined based on the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means C11. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C10.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional task D. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when the gaming ball enters the internal region of the variable ball entering means.

Therefore, in the past, the player could grasp the operation timing of the movable body, and there was a possibility that a fraudulent act such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing was performed.

In addition, the production related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement of the interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent activities and improving the interest of the game.

Means D1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a state can be changed to at least an advantageous state (special state) which is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) which is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. Movable bodies that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball),
Movable body control capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined ball detecting means). With means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the means D1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, the movable body is moved every time by changing the period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) to the actual state of the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state (for example, the opening period). Since it is not necessary to perform the operation at a fixed timing, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game effect using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player can grasp the operation timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means D2. An opportunity ball entering means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through), and
It is provided with a trigger ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entering means.
The gaming machine according to means D1, wherein the operating condition can be satisfied based on the detection of the gaming ball by the trigger ball detecting means.

If the trigger ball entry means that triggers the operation of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means is erroneously detected by using a wire rod or the like to operate the movable body. There is a risk that cheating will be more likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the means D2, since the movable body is configured to operate due to the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Here, for example, if "a configuration in which the operating condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the trigger ball detecting means", the software determines whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. Since it is not necessary to execute the lottery process, the control process can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as attaching a fraudulent ROM or the like that has tampered with the program related to the lottery process.

Means D3. An operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that determine an operation start period from at least the time when the operation condition is satisfied until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state.
Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the trigger ball detecting means, the operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means is provided. The gaming machine according to means D2.

According to the means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is softly selected from the patterns. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from the predetermined trigger to the predetermined advantageous state of the movable body, and it is possible to further enhance the action and effect of the means D1 and the like.

Further, according to this means, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanical selection mechanism in the variable ball entry means, and the structure of the variable ball entry means can be simplified.

Means D4. An effect means capable of executing a preceding effect (opening effect) suggesting that at least the movable body is in the predetermined advantageous state during the operation start period.
An effect pattern storage means for storing a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns, and an effect pattern storage means.
The gaming machine according to means D3, comprising: an effect control means capable of controlling the effect means based on an effect pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above means D4, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state by performing the preceding effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. ..

Furthermore, the player is thrilled without knowing when the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, and has the expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him / her because he / she asks. Along with the behavior of the game ball, the game production related to the movable body will be closely watched, and the interest can be further improved.

In the configuration in which the operation start period from the time when the operation condition is satisfied to the time when the movable body becomes a predetermined advantageous state is variable, the operation condition is satisfied when the operation start period is relatively long. However, there is a risk that the player may feel anxiety and resentment that the movable body may not be in a predetermined advantageous state.

On the other hand, according to this means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the player.

Means D5. A lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection of the trigger entry ball detection means is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, characterized in that the operating conditions are satisfied when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by at least the operating lottery process. ..

According to the means D5, the lottery processing execution means (operation lottery processing) is used to softly determine whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, it is not necessary to perform the movement each time in accordance with a predetermined momentum, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the effect related to the movable body and increase the expectation of the player for the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means D6. A display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the trigger ball detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process.
A variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different variation display times, and a variation pattern storage means.
A variation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the trigger ball detection means.
A display control means for controlling the display means based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means is provided.
The movable body control means
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, wherein the display means is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the movable body may be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player should pay close attention to the fluctuation display along with the behavior of the game ball with the expectation that the movable body will be in an advantageous state while being excited without knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest.

As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the game production related to the movable body and further improve the interest for the player.

In addition, according to the means D6, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display in the display means can be made variable. As a result, the operation start period from the detection of the game ball by the trigger ball detection means until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from the predetermined trigger to the predetermined advantageous state of the movable body, and it is possible to further enhance the action and effect of the means D1 and the like.

Means D7. A first route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger entry means.
A second route in which a game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger entry means and cannot flow down to the special entry means.
A route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D6, wherein the movable body can cause a change in the behavior of the gaming ball that has flowed down to the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball state in which the two game balls flow down continuously with almost no space between them). Similarly, even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as), if all of these multiple game balls are directed toward the triggering ball means, no matter how much the movable body becomes advantageous. There is a possibility that a problem may occur such that no game ball enters the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means D7, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down to one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route. Therefore, the action and effect of providing the movable body will be more effective.

It should be noted that the distribution of the game ball to the second route by the route distribution means may be the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity".

Means D8. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.) is
It is configured so that the state can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route.
A distribution driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means is provided.
The means D7 includes a plurality of the second routes configured such that the time required for the game ball passing through the specific area from the route distribution means to the trigger ball means is different. Described gaming machine.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing each time from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means, the effect related to the movable body becomes monotonous and can be moved by the player. It becomes easier to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, the period from the time when the game ball is sorted by the route sorting means to the triggering ball means can be made variable.

As a result, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined opportunity) until the movable body actually becomes advantageous can be made variable.

Further, according to this means, the period from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to the triggering ball means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball. The person comes to pay attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the time required for the game ball to reach the triggering ball means from the route sorting means is different" means, for example, "the distance from the route sorting means to the triggering ball means is different". included.

Further, a configuration may be configured in which triggering ball means (triggered ball detecting means) are individually provided corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". May move toward one trigger ball detection means (trigger ball detection means) and be detected by the same trigger ball detection means.

For example, "the first second route that allows the game ball to flow down to the first triggering ball means, and the second said second route that allows the game ball to flow down to the second triggering ball means. It may be a "provided" configuration.

Further, a trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first first route" or the "second second route" is provided. It may be configured as a new type. According to such a configuration, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. From that point on, the game ball reaches the triggering ball means (triggered ball detecting means), and the first and second routes have a long time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to means D8, wherein the second route has a second route in which the time to reach the advantageous state is shorter than the time to reach the movable body.

From the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body, from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is long, two game balls enter the inner region of the variable ball entry means. Is continuously entered, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route. Since it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body before the timing when the movable body operates, there is a possibility that the interest will be significantly reduced.

On the contrary, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means rather than the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the time to reach the advantageous state until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is shortened, two to the internal region of the variable ball entry means. Comparison when the game balls are continuously entered, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in a predetermined advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball reaches the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, which may significantly reduce the interest. There is.

On the other hand, according to the means D9, two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is on either the first route or the second route. Even if they are sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first second route having a long time to reach the advantageous state" or "the second route having a short time to reach the advantageous state". Since there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates and the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body remain depending on whether or not the game ball is played, the player has a feeling of expectation for the occurrence of a special game state. You can watch the behavior.

The "second second route" may require a shorter time required for the game ball to pass than the "first second route". For example, the triggering ball means directly from the route distribution means. The purpose is to include a configuration in which the ball enters the ball (such as a configuration in which the distance to the trigger entry means is zero).

Further, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball to pass through the "first route", for example, it is an example to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first route". Can be considered as.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the “first route”. Here, as a means of delay, for example, a configuration in which the game ball reciprocates several times in the same place such as a stage or a crune, or a configuration in which the ball moves forward after making a lap, or a rib or the like is used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball moves forward.

Further, by installing the delay means as described above in the "first route", the game ball that has flowed down to the first route can move more than the time required for the game ball to pass through the "second route". The movable body arrival time to reach the body may be long.

Means D10. The game according to any one of means D2 to D9, wherein the gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the trigger entry means is configured to be unable to flow down (cannot enter) into the special entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means D10, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means D11. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the next game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means D11, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means D11, two game balls enter the internal area during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to one of the first route or the second route, the subsequent second game ball (the next game ball that has passed through a specific area) flows down to the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the ball entry means and the movable body operates, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body has not yet operated and the first route. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to the special ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that has subsequently entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (passes the specific area next to the next). It is also possible to configure the game ball) to flow down to the first route and to be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means D11 is opened / closed in the open state period following the open state period of the opening / closing member through which the game ball has passed when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the member. "

The configuration according to the means D11 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration according to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means D12, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that a game effect is performed to increase the expectation of the player for granting the special gaming state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means D13. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means D1 to D12, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among the plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D13, the type of the special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means D14. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional task E. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

In such a pachinko machine, for example, a guide route for directing a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means to the special ball entry means is provided, and a game ball that deviates from the guide route is provided in the internal region. Some have an off-route (discharge route) for discharging to the outside.

However, in the past, even though the game ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball once deviated from the guide route and guided to the deviated route is then inside the variable ball entry means. It did not contribute to the game of the game, it was just discharged. In this respect, further improvement of interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest.

Means E1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
A first route (guidance route) capable of allowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, and
A second route (discharge route) capable of discharging a game ball that does not flow down to the first route to the outside of the internal region,
A ball detecting means (discharging ball detecting means) capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the second route, and
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a specific processing execution means capable of executing a specific processing advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the above means E1, based on the detection of the game ball discharged via the second route (discharge route), a specific process advantageous to the player is executed, for example, making it easier to generate a special game state. Will be done.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game ball flowing down toward the special ball entry means via the first route (guidance route), but also the game ball discharged via the second route is used to provide new playability. Can be given, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E2. The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when a gaming ball is detected by the ball detecting means.

According to the above means E2, every time a game ball is detected by the ball detecting means, it is possible to execute a specific process that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player. ..

Means E3. A lottery processing executing means capable of executing a predetermined lottery processing based on the detection by the ball detecting means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process, the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the means E3, the specific process that is advantageous to the player is not executed every time the ball detecting means detects the game ball, so that the specific process is suppressed from becoming monotonous and the specific process is executed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for this. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E4. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means is provided.
The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of gaming balls counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number.

According to the above means E4, even when the number of game balls flowing out of the first route (guidance route) and flowing in the second route (discharge route) becomes relatively large, the deterioration of the interest for the player is suppressed. be able to.

Means E5. A counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means, and
A lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number is provided.
The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process, the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the means E5, every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means becomes a predetermined number or more, it is not necessary to execute a specific process advantageous to the player, so that the same operation as that of the means E3 is performed. The effect is played.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, a state can be changed to at least an advantageous state (special state) which is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) which is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. Equipped with a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball)
The specific processing execution means is
Described in any one of means E1 to E5, which comprises a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Gaming machine.

According to the means E6, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. A route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state is provided.
The gaming machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body can cause a change in the behavior of the gaming ball that has flowed down to the first route.

Under the configuration according to the means E6, for example, when a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, the two game balls are almost spaced apart) when the predetermined condition is about to be satisfied. Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a continuous ball state in which the ball continuously flows down without leaving a space, all of these multiple game balls are discharged through the second route (discharging). If you go toward the route), no matter how much the movable body is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as no game ball entering the special ball entry means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means E7, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first preceding game ball is the first route or Since it is possible to direct one game ball toward the first route, such as flowing down to one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flowing down to the other route, the movable body can be moved. The provided action and effect will be more effective.

As a result, the player comes to pay close attention to the behavior of the game ball distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of expectation, and can further improve the interest.

Means E8. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball-entry means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to means E6 or E7, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means E8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state is increased. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means E9. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is more than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Described in means E6 or E7, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among a plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. Gaming machine.

According to the means E9, the type of the special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means E10. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable body moves with respect to the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, which is characterized in that it has a structure capable of acting.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means E10, it is higher than that of a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) as the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition. There is a probability that you will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball (last) involved in the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, or the game ball is variablely entered together with the game ball involved in the fulfillment of the predetermined condition (last). Even if another game ball that has entered the ball means does not enter the special entry means, there is a higher probability that the game ball that has subsequently entered the variable entry means will enter the special entry means. You will be given a chance to ball.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to put the game ball into the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Therefore, the means E10 is referred to as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific region is detected by the ball detecting means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening / closing member that the game ball has passed through is in the open state period and thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the opening / closing member during the open state period. " ..

In the configuration related to the means E10, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the time from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the movable body starts to operate, the operating period of the movable body after the start of operation, and the like are adjusted. By doing so, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means E11. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E10.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional problem F. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, since the conventional variable ball-entry means is provided with winning openings (specific areas) at a plurality of places, for example, on both the left and right sides, a game ball may enter the variable ball-entry means from a plurality of directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, they may interfere with each other depending on the entry timing of the game balls, and even one ball is specially entered. There is a risk that the game ball will not flow down to the route desired by the player, such as not going to the ball means, and the player's interest will be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest.

Means F1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
An opportunity ball entering means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through), and
A first route that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means,
A second route that allows a game ball that does not flow down to the first route to flow down to the triggering ball means,
A route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route, and
A game ball that is provided so as to be able to change state into at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and has flowed down to the first route. Movable bodies that can change their behavior (can act on the game ball),
A movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means. With
The specific area is provided so that the game balls can pass one by one and can be provided at only one place.
A gaming machine characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding a gaming ball one by one to the specific area is provided at only one place.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger entry means", for example, "the trigger entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the trigger entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detecting means", a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the triggering ball detecting means" or "the ball entering detection of the triggering ball detecting means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery" and the like are included.

According to the means F1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present means, by providing the trigger ball entering means for detecting the operation trigger of the movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, the movable body is predetermined based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal region. Since the configuration is such that whether or not the player is in an advantageous state is determined, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has entered the inner region of the variable ball entry means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down to either the first route or the second route. Since it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route, the above movable body is provided. The effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that the expectation of the occurrence of the special gaming state may be improved by inserting a plurality of game balls into the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

In addition, in this means, a specific area is provided at only one place where the game balls can pass one by one, and a ball passage capable of guiding the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one place. Therefore, the game balls can be appropriately guided to the route distribution means one by one. As a result, the above-mentioned action and effect can be more reliably achieved.

Further, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball and the subsequent second game ball each flow down to which route. Since the results differ depending on the situation, the player will have a sense of expectation and will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means F2. The gaming machine according to means F1, wherein a gaming ball that does not pass through the ball passage is configured so as not to pass through the specific area.

If a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage is configured to pass through a specific area, another game ball that does not pass through the ball passage passes through the ball passage and flows down toward the specific area. There is a risk of getting in the way. On the other hand, according to the means F2, the game ball cannot pass through the specific region unless it passes through the ball passage, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned trouble can be suppressed and the action and effect of the means F1 can be further enhanced. can.

Means F3. The gaming machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening / closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided to the opening / closing member one by one. As a result, it is possible to suppress problems such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening / closing member at the same time and biting the balls.

Means F4. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only a gaming ball launched with a predetermined strength by the launching means can pass through.

According to the means F4, the ball passage is provided only at a position (for example, the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball launched by the launching means with a predetermined strength (for example, right-handed) can pass. The action and effect of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means F5. 2. The gaming machine described in either.

According to the means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage in succession, the preceding first game ball and the succeeding first game ball are caused by the behavior of the preceding first game ball or the like. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as collision with the second game ball and interfering with each other. As a result, the effect of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced. Here, the above-mentioned regulating means also includes a means of changing the state from the first state to the second state by the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. The game according to any one of means F1 to F5, wherein the gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the trigger entry means is configured to be unable to flow down (cannot enter) into the special entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means F6, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means F7. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the next game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F6.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than a game ball that has entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means F7, two game balls enter the internal region during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to one of the first route or the second route, the subsequent second game ball (the next game ball that has passed through a specific area) flows down to the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the ball entry means and the movable body operates, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body has not yet operated and the first route. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to the special ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that has subsequently entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (passes the specific area next to the next). It is also possible to configure the game ball) to flow down to the first route and to be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means F7 is opened / closed during the open state period following the open state period of the opening / closing member through which the game ball has passed when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the member. "

The configuration according to the means F7 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration related to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means F8. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F7, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means F8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entry means is increased, so that the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state is increased. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means F9. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means F1 to F8, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among the plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of the special gaming state is determined based on the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means F10. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional problem G. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect related to the movable body is monotonous, for example, the movable body performs a predetermined motion every time when the game ball enters the internal region of the variable ball entering means. As a result, the player's interest in the movement of the movable body (feeling of excitement) tended to diminish. In this respect, further improvement of interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

Means G1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means capable of entering (or passing) a game ball that has passed through the specific area, and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
A first trigger ball entry means capable of entering (or passing) a game ball that has passed through the specific area, and
A first trigger ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first trigger ball entering means, and a first trigger ball detecting means.
A second trigger ball entry means capable of entering (or passing) a game ball that has passed through the specific area, and
A second trigger ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second trigger ball entering means, and a second trigger ball detecting means.
A first flow route capable of flowing a game ball that has passed through the specific area to the first trigger entry means, and
A second flow route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the second trigger entry means,
A route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first flow route or the second flow route.
A movable body that can change the state of at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the specific region. When,
A predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body is made to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the first triggering ball means or the second triggering ball means. It is equipped with a movable body control means that can execute the control.
In a specific state, the ratio of the game ball that can be in the predetermined advantageous state is different between the case where the game ball flows down to the first flow-down route and the case where the game ball flows down to the second flow-down route. A featured gaming machine.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first trigger entry means or the second trigger entry means", for example, "the first trigger entry means". Based on "when a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second trigger ball detection means" or "the ball entry detection of the first trigger ball detection means or the second trigger ball detection means". When a predetermined operation lottery is performed and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery, "etc. are included.

According to the means G1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, by providing various triggering ball means (various triggering ball detecting means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, the game ball entering the internal region is provided. Since it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state based on the behavior, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state can be obtained differs depending on whether the game ball flows down to the first flow-down route and the game ball flows down to the second flow-down route. There is. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route and reach the first triggering ball means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area is the second. The gaming machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required to flow down the flow-down route to reach the second trigger ball entry means is different.

According to the means G2, the period until the movable body can reach a predetermined advantageous state is variable depending on whether the game ball flows down to the first flow-down route or the game ball flows down to the second flow-down route. Can be.

As a result, the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the game effect using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine according to means G1 or G2, wherein the first flow route or the second flow route includes a delay means for delaying the flow of the gaming ball.

According to the means G3, even when the length of the first flow route or the second flow route is relatively short, by providing the delay means, it takes time for the game ball to reach a predetermined position, etc. Can be relatively long. As a result, the game space can be effectively used. Here, as a means of delay, for example, a configuration in which the game ball reciprocates several times in the same place such as a stage or a crune, or a configuration in which the ball moves forward after making a lap, or a rib or the like is used to stop the momentum of the game ball and allow time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball moves forward.

Means G4. A lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection of the first trigger ball entry detection means or the second trigger ball entry detection means is provided.
It is configured so that the predetermined operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.
In the specific state, the ratio at which the predetermined lottery result is obtained between the case where the game ball is detected by the first trigger ball detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second trigger ball detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machines are configured to be different from each other.

According to the means G4, the lottery processing execution means (operation lottery processing) is used to softly determine whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, it is not necessary to perform the movement each time in accordance with a predetermined momentum, so that it is possible to suppress the monotonicization of the effect related to the movable body and increase the expectation of the player for the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present means, the ratio at which a predetermined lottery result is obtained is the ratio between the case where the game ball is detected by the first trigger ball detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second trigger ball detection means. Since they are configured differently, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means G5. The route distribution means
It is configured so that the state can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow-down route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second flow-down route.
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, wherein in the specific state, the ratio of the route distribution means to the first state and the ratio of the route distribution means to the second state are different.

According to the above means G5, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, so that the interest can be further improved. can. In addition, the ratio of the route distribution means to the first state and the ratio of the route distribution means to the second state may be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. A predetermined route that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means,
In the specific state, a route distribution means (upstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body can cause a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route.

Under the configuration related to each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no space between them). Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a continuous ball state, the same shall apply hereinafter.) Even if the ball is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as no game ball entering the special ball entry means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means G6, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball takes a predetermined route or , The first flow-down route or the second flow-down route, and the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route. Since it is possible to direct each of them, the action and effect of providing the movable body will be more effective.

Means G7. A gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the triggered ball entering means (the first triggered ball entering means and / or the second triggered ball entering means) cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot enter). The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G6, characterized in that it is configured in.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means G7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means G8. When a gaming ball that has passed through the specific area enters the triggering ball means (the first triggering ball means or the second triggering ball means), after the next of the gaming balls, The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G7, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the specific region.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means G8, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means G8, two game balls enter the internal region during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to a predetermined route, or one of the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed the specific area next) flows down to the other route. Then, after that, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow-down route or the second flow-down route enters the trigger ball entry means (first trigger ball entry means or second trigger ball entry means) and is a movable body. When the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route passes through the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet operated and the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route has not entered the special ball entry means. After that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passed through the specific area next to the next) flows down to the predetermined route, and is special due to the action of the movable body. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a chance to enter the ball is given to the ball entry means.

Therefore, when the means G8 is referred to as "a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball means (the first trigger ball means or the second trigger ball means), the game Any of the means G1 to G7 characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the opening / closing member during the opening period after the opening state period of the opening / closing member through which the ball has passed. It may be paraphrased as "a game machine described in a crab."

The configuration according to the means G8 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration related to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means G9. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G8, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means G9, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state is increased. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means G10. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means G1 to G9, characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means G10, the type of the special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means G11. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

Conventional problem H. Conventionally, as a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine that shoots a gaming ball into a gaming area to play a game is known. For example, a variable ball entry means that is opened based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means is provided, and the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal region. There are known pachinko machines that generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the ball enters the special ball entry means (V winning opening) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some such pachinko machines are provided with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of a game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a fixed timing each time, for example, when the gaming ball enters the internal region of the variable ball entering means.

Therefore, in the past, the player could grasp the operation timing of the movable body, and there was a possibility that a fraudulent act such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing was performed.

In addition, the production related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement of the interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent activities and improving the interest of the game.

Means H1. A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal region to enter (or pass through), and
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
An opportunity ball entering means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through), and
The behavior of a game ball that is provided so as to be able to change state into at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and has passed through the specific area. Movable bodies (which can act on the game ball) that can cause changes in
A movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means. ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an opening / closing pattern determining means for determining which of a plurality of opening / closing patterns is to be executed when controlling the opening / closing of the opening / closing member.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger entry means", for example, "the trigger entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the trigger entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detecting means", a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the triggering ball detecting means" or "the ball entering detection of the triggering ball detecting means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery" and the like are included.

According to the means H1, by providing a movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal region. For example, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in the present means, by providing the trigger ball entering means for detecting the operation trigger of the movable body in the internal region of the variable ball entering means, the movable body is predetermined based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal region. Since the configuration is such that whether or not the player is in an advantageous state is determined, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, since a plurality of opening / closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening / closing member) are provided, the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes, so that the movable body is tentatively moved every time from a predetermined trigger. Even if the movement is configured to be performed at a fixed timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that has entered the internal region of the variable ball entry means is different. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the operation timing of the movable body.

When changing the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means, for example, a method of providing a plurality of operating patterns of the movable body and changing the selection probability of the pattern to change the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means. However, it is possible to change the movement mode of the movable body that changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a predetermined movement, and adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate. The work is very difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this respect, according to this means, it is possible to more easily change the ball entry rate or the like to the special ball entry means.

Means H2. When a predetermined opening / closing pattern is performed among the plurality of opening / closing patterns, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening / closing pattern is not performed. The gaming machine according to the featured means H1.

According to the means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing ratio of the opening / closing member is relatively large is performed, more game balls can be entered into the variable entry means at the same time. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the configuration in which the movable body is likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state, the player's expectation for granting a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the special ball entry means, is increased. You can produce. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H3. A lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the entry into the trigger ball entry means, and
A display means that starts a variable display based on the ball entering the trigger ball entry means and displays a stop display in a predetermined mode based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process.
A holding means capable of holding a variable display in the display means a predetermined number of times is provided.
The gaming machine according to means H1 or means H2, characterized in that the operating conditions are satisfied when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by at least the operating lottery process.

According to the means H3, since the movable body does not move every time in accordance with a predetermined trigger, the action and effect of the means H1 and the like are enhanced, and the monotonous effect related to the movable body is suppressed and the movable body is movable. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the movement of the body.

In addition, in this means, the frequency with which the movable body operates can be increased by providing the holding means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. One of means H1 to H3, which comprises means for determining which operation pattern among a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is put into the advantageous state. Described gaming machine.

According to the means H4, the action effect of the means H1 and the like can be further enhanced by providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable body. Although it is very difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate, the behavior of the game ball is diversified, and the interest can be improved, as described above. It is possible to suppress such cheating.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one opening / closing pattern among the plurality of opening / closing patterns includes a plurality of opening / closing operations.

According to the means H5, since the rate at which the opening / closing member is opened is relatively large, more game balls can be entered into the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of entering the ball into the special ball entry means.

Means H6. Described in means H5, wherein at least one of the plurality of opening / closing operations has an opening time longer than the firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the gaming ball by the launching means. Gaming machine.

According to the means H6, the action and effect of the means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. A first route that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means,
A second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the trigger ball entry means,
A route distribution means capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H6, wherein the movable body can cause a change in the behavior of a gaming ball that has flowed down to the first route.

Under the configuration related to each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no space between them). Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a continuous ball state, the same shall apply hereinafter.) Even if the ball is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as no game ball entering the special ball entry means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal region of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the trigger ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down to one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down to the other route. Therefore, the action and effect of providing the movable body will be more effective.

Further, when two consecutive game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball and the subsequent second game ball each flow down to which route. Since the results differ depending on the situation, the player will have a sense of expectation and will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means H8. The game according to any one of means H1 to H7, wherein the gaming ball that has entered (or passed) into the trigger entry means is configured to be unable to flow down (cannot enter) into the special entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the trigger ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball may always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine are likely to be performed according to the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a risk of interfering with other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without going through the opportunity ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means H8, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned various problems can be suppressed. Can be done.

Means H9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the next game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently fired at predetermined intervals, a plurality of variable ball entering means may be used during one open state when the variable ball entering means is opened. Situations that are advantageous to the player, such as the continuous entry of game balls, are unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nail of the game board is adjusted in the game hall and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

That is, if a plurality of gaming balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), the action (assist) of the movable body is received. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a gaming ball does not enter the special entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of gaming balls do not enter the variable entry means in succession at the same time. There is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will diminish and the interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means H9, there is a higher probability that a game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time as the game ball that entered the trigger ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special. You will be given a chance to enter the ball entry means.

That is, even if another game ball does not enter the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the trigger entry means, or the ball enters the variable entry means together with the game ball that has entered the opportunity entry means. Even if another game ball does not enter the special entry means, the game ball that subsequently enters the variable entry means is given a higher probability of entering the special entry means. It will be.

As a result, the player can actively play the game in order to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means even after confirming that the game ball has entered the opportunity ball entry means. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal region during a predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first first game ball that precedes the ball (a game that first passes through a specific area). The ball) flows down to one of the first route or the second route, the subsequent second game ball (the next game ball that has passed through a specific area) flows down to the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the ball entry means and the movable body operates, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body has not yet operated and the first route. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to the special ball does not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that has subsequently entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (passes the specific area next to the next). It is also possible to configure the game ball) to flow down to the first route and to be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means H9 is opened / closed during the open state period following the open state period of the opening / closing member through which the game ball has passed when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body can act on the gaming ball that has passed through the member. "

The configuration according to the means H9 includes the time from the time when the game ball enters the triggering ball means to the start of operation of the movable body and the time after the start of operation of the movable body under the configuration related to each of the above means. By adjusting the operation period and the like, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the gaming ball enters the special ball entering means as compared with the case where the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, which is configured to be easy.

According to the above means H10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of entering the special ball entering means is increased, so that the player's expectation for granting the special gaming state is increased. be able to.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means H11. The special game state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special game states having different game values given to the player.
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is provided.
When the movable body is controlled to the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined of the plurality of types of special gaming states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means H1 to H10, wherein the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type among the plurality of types of special gaming states for the player) is easily determined by the type determining means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of the special gaming state is determined based on the behavior of the gaming ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

Further, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it is easy to determine the special gaming state of a predetermined type among the special gaming states of a plurality of types, so that the special gaming state is given (more). It is possible to perform a game effect that raises the player's expectation for (giving a special game state of a type having a high game value) and the like.

As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal region of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) given after the special game state. Is included.

Means H12. A starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
It is provided with an opening / closing control means capable of executing the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entering means (opening / closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H11.

In addition, in the case of "when a predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the start entry means", for example, "the start entry ball capable of detecting the game ball entered into the start entry means". Under the configuration provided with the "detection means", a predetermined start lottery is performed based on "when the game ball is detected by the start entry detection means" or "the entry detection of the start entry detection means". "When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the start lottery" and the like are included.

It should be noted that, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10 and the configurations of the means B1 to the means B12. Any part or all of the configuration, any part or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to E11 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means F1 to F10, some or all of the means G1 to G11, and the means H1. -Any combination of at least one of any part or all of the configurations of the means H12 may be carried out.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means B1 to the means B12, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the above means D1 to D14, the above means E1 to means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means C1 to C11, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to the means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means D1 to D14, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to the means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means E1 to the means E11, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to the means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means F1 to the means F10, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to the means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means G1 to the means G11, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to the means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a part or all of the configurations of the means H1 to the means H12, a part or all of the configurations of the means A1 to the means A10, the means B1 to the means B12 Part or all of the above means, some or all of the means C1 to C11, some or all of the means D1 to D14, the means E1 to the means. The configuration of any part or all of E11, the configuration of any part or all of means F1 to means F10, the configuration of any part or all of means G1 to means G11, and the means. At least one configuration of any part or all of H1 to means H12 may be arbitrarily combined.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied are shown below.

(B) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching means. An example is a ball-and-ball game machine provided with a game area in which the game ball is guided and each ball-entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operating port, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(B) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example, "an operating means operated by the player (game ball launching handle), a launching means for flipping and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means (launching motor, etc.), and the launching means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. A ball-and-ball game machine provided with a variable winning device, an operating port, etc.) so that the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(C) The game machine in each of the above means, or each of the ball game machines, is a pachinko machine or a game machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 30 ... Game board, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning section, 33b ... 2nd starting winning section, 37 ... Central winning unit, 42 ... Directing display device, 44 ... Display for special gate Device, 224a, 224b ... Start winning switch, 261 ... Main control device, 401 ... Internal area, 404 ... Blade member, 406 ... Route distribution area, 407 ... Win / fail lottery area, 408 ... Type lottery area, 409 ... Character operation lottery Area, 410 ... Rotating body unit, 414 ... Rotating body, 427 ... 1st V winning passage, 437 ... Internal ball entry detection switch, 461 ... 1st special ball entry detection switch, 602 ... Fall passage, 603 ... Route distribution member, 604 ... Normal guide passage, 605 ... Special guide passage, 650 ... Special gate, 651 ... Special gate switch, 721 ... Bypass mechanism, 722 ... Movable accessory, 731 ... 15R entrance, 732 ... 7R entrance, 733 ... 3R entry port, 741 ... type distribution mechanism, 737 ... bypass passage, 738 ... second special entry detection switch.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball,
The game area where the launched game ball is guided, and
It has an opening / closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area. A variable ball entry means that allows only a game ball that has passed through a specific area to enter the internal area.
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter,
A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a gaming ball enters the special ball entering means.
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and the behavior of the game ball is changed. Movable bodies that can be made to
It is provided with a movable body control means capable of executing a control for making the movable body perform a predetermined operation in a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the period from at least a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

Images